12003
155
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/156
Pagina verder
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD/VCR
IN
OUT
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
D
D/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
PB/CB
Y
PR/CR
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
VIDEO IN
Picture Quality
Basic Good Best
HDD/DVD
VV VV VV
VCR
VV
(required)
--
Choose one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of the equipment you possess.
AUDIO OUT
TV
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Audio cable
(supplied)
Component
video cable
(commercially
available)
This unit
VIDEO OUT
Video cable
(supplied)
S-Video cable
(commercially
available)
These jacks are useful only in
HDD / DVD mode.
/
DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
(Back of TV)
Plug in the AC power
cord of this unit.
or
Cable
TV signal
or
Cable
TV signal
Connect
Disconnect
Antenna
Antenna
(Back of this unit)
(Back of TV)
RF cable
(supplied)
Connect
3
2
1
4
Basic Audio Connection Video Connections
(
VV
= Available,
-
= Not Available)
OR
TV
This unit
OR
(Compatible with
the Progressive
Scan mode)
QQ
QQ
uu
uu
ii
ii
cc
cc
kk
kk
GG
GG
uu
uu
ii
ii
dd
dd
ee
ee
DVD / Video Cassette Recorder with HDD
1 Connection to a TV
HDRV200F
1VMN21833 E4380UD / E438PUD ★★★★★
Note
You can connect to TV
with A/V cables or RF
cable.
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 2
1
After making all the necessary connections, turn on the
TV,select the appropriate external input channel.
2
Press POWER. The Display shown below will appear.
This menu may not appear if you have already turned
on the unit before. See page
21-24 of the Owner’s
Manual in such case.
If you press
PLAY B at this point, “English” will
be selected automatically and the steps
3 and 4 can
be skipped.
3
Press / to select English,Français (French)
or Español (Spanish). Then, press ENTER.
After selecting the language, the Auto Channel Preset
will start automatically.
4
After Auto Channel Preset is finished,the Auto Clock
function will be activated automatically and the cor-
rect time will be set.
EnglishEnglish
Français
OSD LanguageOSD Language
EspaEspañol
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
POWER
1
Press SETUP.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
3
Using / , select Channel Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select TV Audio Select.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
5
Using / , select Stereo or SAP.
Press
ENTER.
Stereo:
Outputs main-audio.
SAP (Secondary Audio Program):
Outputs sub-audio.
6
Press SETUP to exit.
SAPSAP
StereoStereo
TV ATV Audio Selectudio Select
TV ATV Audio Selectudio Select
ManManual Presetual Preset
Auto Presetuto Preset
Channel SettingChannel Setting
Notes on TV channel audio
Refer to the following table to check the appropriate
setting.
Main-audio Sub-audio
channel channel
STEREO SAP STEREO
STEREO NONE STEREO
MONO SAP MONO
MONO NONE MONO
STEREO SAP SAP
STEREO NONE STEREO
MONO SAP SAP
MONO NONE MONO
Stereo
SAP
2
Initial Setups
First Time You Turn on the Unit
Broadcast audio
Selected
audio
HDD/DVD/VCR
recording
TV Audio Setting
E4380UD_QG 05.11.22 2:06 PM Page 3
3
Recording and Playback Information
This unit is compatible with the following discs.
Discs with the following logos can be played back on the
unit. Playback of other disc types is not guaranteed.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
LogoDisc
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RW
(VIDEO/VR mode)
DVD-R
(VIDEO mode)
CD-DA
(AUDIO CD)
CD-R
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
CD-RW
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
DVDs are recorded in different color systems throughout
the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which
is used primarily in the United States and Canada).
This unit uses NTSC, you must use DVDs recorded in the
NTSC system. You cannot play back DVDs recorded in oth-
er color systems.
DVDs must be labeled for ALL regions or for Region
1.
Look for the symbols below on your DVDs.
Playable discs
Color systems
Region codes
Discs which can be used with this recorder:
DVD-R disc: up to
16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended)
DVD-RW disc:2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended)
Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder:
MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x
TDK DVD-RW disc 2x
JVC DVD-RW disc 4x
MITSUBISHI DVD-R disc 8x
DVD players with are capable of playing DVD-RW disc
recorded in VR mode.
Disc type Disc format
Video mode
VR mode
Video mode
Functions
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
Playback, recording, Original
List / Playlist editing
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-R
DVD-R
Recordable disc
You can select a Rec Mode among six options,and the
recording time and the picture/audio quality of recorded
material depends on the Rec Mode you select.
To select the Rec Mode you prefer, press
REC MODE
repeatedly.
(poor)
(good)
Rec
Mode
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Recording
time
18 min
36 min
72 min
108 min
144 min
180 min
Video / Sound
Quality
Disc Size
8 cm Disc
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
60 min
120 min
240 min
360 min
480 min
600 min
34 H
68 H
136 H
204 H
272 H
340 H
12 cm Disc
HDD
(Internal)
(poor)
(poor)
(good)
(good)
Rec Mode
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 4
The recording format type you set here will be
memorized and applied to the disc whenever you format
DVD-RW discs.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Using / , select DVD Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select DVD Recording Format.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
4
Using / , select VR or Video.
Press
ENTER.
Auto Format
Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, the
unit will automatically format the disc in the
recording format type you set in this section.
DVD Recording FVD Recording Formatmat
VRVR
Video
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
4
Formatting a Disc
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 5
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to the internal HDD or to DVDs.
Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly.
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Step 1:
Choose a disc type & the Recording Format.
(Only If you are recording to DVD.)
or
Step 5: Start Recording.
When recording to the HDD:
Press
REC / OTR (HDD).
When recording to the DVD:
Press
REC / OTR (DVD).
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAUSE
REC/OTR
Step 4:
Select the desired channel to
record.
CH 8
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS
PROGRAM
TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
I
HDD Rec 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
HDD MODE
Step 6: Stop Recording.
SKIP
REPLAY SKIP
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP
REV FWDPLAY
PAUSE
I
HDD Rec Stop 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
C
HDD MODE
This operation may take
a while to be recognized.
Step 3:
Select the Rec Mode.
HDD CH8
65:56LP
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAUSE
Step 2: Preparing the media
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
CHANNEL
123
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
4 Close the disc tray.1 Turn on the unit.
It may take a while to
load the disc.
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
3 Open the disc tray,and
place a disc on the tray.
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR
HDD DVD
REC/OTR
REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
If you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, Auto Format will start automatically.
2 Select the device you want to use.
(If you are recording to the HDD,
skip to step 3.)
5
HDD / DVD Recording
Note
HDD is a temporary storage location.
HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage
location until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
160GB Hard Disc
This unit is equipped with an 160 GB hard disc which allows you to record up to 340 hours (with SEP mode).
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 6
6
Basic Dubbing
We illustrated HDD to DVD dubbing here as an example.
Refer to the Owners Manual on how to perform other
types of dubbing.
1
Press DUBBING MENU.
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode menu will
appear.
2
Using / ,select the desired dubbing direction,
then press
ENTER.
Example: HDD
DVD
3
Using / ,select a desired Rec Mode.
Press
ENTER.
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Select Program.
Press
ENTER.
Program List will appear.
Dubbing List
Program List (Oram List (Original)
1 1 Title 1Title 1
2 2 Title 2Title 2
3 3 Title 3Title 3
4 4 Title 4Title 4
5 5 Title 5Title 5
6 6 Title 6Title 6
7 7 Title 7Title 7
8 8 Title 8Title 8
DUBBINGDUBBING
Dubbing List
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Select ProgSelect Programam
Direction HDD DDirection HDD DVDVD
Mode XPMode XP
DUBBINGDUBBING
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Dubbing Direction
XPXP
High High
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Rec ModeRec Mode
DUBBINGDUBBING
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DUBBINGDUBBING
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Dubbing Direction
XPXP
High High
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Rec ModeRec Mode
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
5
Using / ,select a desired program.
Press
ENTER.
Program List Menu will appear.
6
Using / ,select Add to Dubbing List.
Press
ENTER.
The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
7
Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until you select all programs
to be dubbed.
8
After selecting all the programs you want, press
RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
9
Using / , select Dubbing Start.
Press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
10
Using / ,select Ye s .PressENTER.
Dubbing will start.
It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing
preparation mode:
Press the Device Select Button of the recording
media first, then press
STOP C. Or,press
STOP/EJECT CAon the front panel.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press
the Device Select Button of the recording
media
first, then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds
or press
STOP/EJECT CAon the front panel.
Yes NoNo
StarStart DubDubbing?bing?
DubDubbing List
2 2 Title 2Title 2
4 4 Title 4Title 4
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Select ProgSelect Programam
Direction HDD DDirection HDD DVDVD
Mode XPMode XP
DUBBINGDUBBING
DubDubbing List
Program List (Oram List (Original)
1 1 Title 1Title 1
2 2 Title 2Title 2
3 3 Title 3Title 3
4 4 Title 4Title 4
5 5 Title 5Title 5
6 6 Title 6Title 6
7 7 Title 7Title 7
8 8 Title 8Title 8
2 2 Title 2Title 2
DUBBINGDUBBING
DecideDecide
PlaPlaylist
Add to DubAdd to Dubbing List.bing List.
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 7
You must first finalize the disc before playing it back on
other unit.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Using / , select DVD Menu, then press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Finalize,then press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
If the disc has already been finalized,
Undo
finalize
will be listed in the menu instead of
Finalize(DVD-RW only).To Undo the
finalization of the disc, select
Undo Finalize
and press ENTER.
4
Using / , select Yes ,then press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / , select Ye s , then press ENTER.
Finalizing will start.
If you want to stop the process, press
ENTER.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
FinalizFinalize
CancelCancel
Yes NoNo
Are yAre you sure?
Yes NoNo
Finalize disc?
DVD-R
DVD-R
7
Finalize
8
HDD / DVD Playback
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
If you are playing the HDD,skip to step 4.
2
Press OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray.
3
Insert the disc with its label facing up. Align the Disc
to the disc tray guide.
Press
OPEN / CLOSE A again to close the disc
tray.
Press
PLAY B to start playing back a CD.
For HDD / DVD Playback,proceed to step 4.
It may take a while to load the disc.
4
PressTOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
5
Using / / / ,select a desired title, then press
PLAY B.
Playback will start.
6
Press STOP C to stop playback.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
disc tray guide
CD
CD
CD
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 8
9
VCR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MODE
VCR
REC/OTR
STOP PAUSE
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
PLAY
Press VCR first.
1
Insert a prerecorded videotape. Press PLAY B to
begin playback.
If there is no record tab, playback starts
automatically.
2
During playback, press PAUSE F.
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
3
Press PLAY B to resume playback.
4
Press STOP C to stop playback.
5
Press STOP / EJECT C A on the front panel of the
unit to eject the videotape.
VCRVCR
VCR
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
STOP / EJECT C A
POWER
Before recording,make sure:
The desired channel is selected by pressing the
Number Buttons
or CHANNEL / .
There is a videotape with a record tab in the unit.
The desired Rec Mode (SP:Standard Play or SLP: Super
Long Play) is selected by pressing
REC MODE on the
remote control.
Rec Mode
Stereo or SAP is selected.
Press
VCR first.
1
Press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin the recording.
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press
PAUSE F. After the unit has been in pause for five
minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the
videotape and the video head from damage.
2
Press STOP C when the recording is completed.
VCRVCR
VCR
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a
recorded videotape, remove its record tab.
To record on it later,cover the hole with
cellophane tape.
Record tab
Basic Recording
Basic Playback
Tape speed
Type of tape T160T120
Recording / Playback Time
T60
2-2 / 3 hours2 hours
1 hourSP mode
8 hours6 hours3 hoursSLP mode
T210
3-1 / 2 hours
10-1 / 2 hours
E4380UD_QG 05.11.16 2:51 PM Page 9
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Owner’s Manual
Remote control
(NB300UD)
with two
AA batteries
• RF cable
(WPZ0901TM002 or
WPZ090
1CAB01)
Audio / Video cables
(WPZ0
102TM015 or
WPZ0
102LTE01)
Owners Manual
(
1
VMN2
1
832)
Quick Use Guide
(
1
VMN2
1
833)
Blank Media
DVD-R disc x
1
(
KDDZZZZMB001
)
Please read before using this equipment.
If you need additional operating assistance after reading this owners
manual or to order replacement accessories, please call
TOLL FREE:
1-800-605-8453
or visit our web site at http://www.SylvaniaConsumerElectronics.com
Before you use this unit , you need to complete connections. Refer to
Connections on pages
1719.
To record a program easily, refer to Easy HDD / DVD Recording on pages
3233 after connections are completed.
HDRV200F
Owners Manual
DVD / Video Cassette Recorder with HDD
Supplied Accessories
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEORESET
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
INSTRUCCIONES EN ESPAÑOL INCLUIDAS.
Recordable disc
Discs which can be used with this recorder:
DVD-R disc: up to
16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended)
DVD-RW disc:2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended)
Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder:
MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x TDK DVD-RW disc 2x
JVC DVD-RW disc 4x MITSUBISHI DVD-R disc 8x
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 1
Precautions
Before You Start
2
Laser Safety
This unit employs a laser. Only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this device, due to possible eye injury.
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
CAUTION: VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
LOCATION: INSIDE, NEAR THE DECK MECHANISM.
WARNING
: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLI-
ANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
FCC WARNING- This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this
equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the manual. The
user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.
CAUTION:TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION:POUR ÉVITER LES CHOC ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA
FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND.
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING
This products packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your local recycling regu-
lations.
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning chemical wastes.
For Customer Use:
Read carefully the information located at the back of this unit and enter below the Serial No. Retain this information for future refer-
ence.
Model No.
_____________________
Serial No. _____________________
Make your contribution to the environment!!!
Used up batteries do not belong in the dust bin.
You can dispose of them at a collection point for used up batteries or special waste.
Contact your council for details.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated,dangerous voltage
within the products enclosure that may be of suffi-
cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock
to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the appli-
ance.
CAUTION
:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,DO
NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SER-
VICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 2
3
Precautions (Contd)
Before You Start
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instruc-
tions should be read before the appliance is operated.
2. Retain Instructions- The safety and operating instruc-
tions should be retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in
the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5. Cleaning - Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
EXCEPTION: A product that is meant for uninterrupted
service and, that for some specific reason, such as the pos-
sibility of the loss of an authorization code for a CATV con-
verter, is not intended to be unplugged by the user for clean-
ing or any other purpose, may exclude the reference to
unplugging the appliance in the cleaning description other-
wise required in item 5.
6. Attachments - Do not use attachments not recom-
mended by the product manufacturer as they may cause
hazards.
7. Water and Moisture- Do not use this product near water, for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laun-
dry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and
the like.
8. Accessories - Do not place this product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with
a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
recommended by the manufacturer,or
sold with the product. Any mounting of
the appliance should follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by
the manufacturer. An appliance and cart
combination should be moved with
care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combi-
nation to overturn.
9. Ventilation - Slots and openings in the cabinet are provid-
ed for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface.This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufactur-
er's instructions have been adhered to.
10. Power Sources - This product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking
label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to
your home, consult your appliance dealer or local pow-
er company. For products intended to operate from bat-
tery power, or other sources, refer to the operating
instructions.
11. Grounding or Polarization - This product is equipped with
a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other).This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, con-
tact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do
not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying
particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience recep-
tacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
13. Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide
some protection against voltage surges and built-up sta-
tic charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code,
ANSI / NFPA No. 70, provides information with regard
to proper grounding of the mast and supporting struc-
ture, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna dis-
charge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of
antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding elec-
trodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
(Fig.A)
14. Lightning - For added protection for this product during
a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and
unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This
will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and
power-line surges.
15. Power Lines - An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into
such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep
from touching such power lines or circuits as contact
with them might be fatal.
16. Overloading - Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17. Object and Liquid Entry - Never push objects of any kind
into this product through any openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could
result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any
kind on the product.
18. Servicing - Do not attempt to service this product your-
self as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing
to qualified service personnel.
19. Damage Requiring Service - Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service per-
sonnel under the following conditions:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a qual-
ified technician to restore the product to its normal oper-
ation.
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance this indicates a need for service.
20. Replacement Parts - When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician has used replace-
ment parts specified by the manufacturer or have the
same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other
hazards.
2
1. Safety Check - Upon completion of any service or repairs
to this product, ask the service technician to perform
safety checks to determine that the product is in proper
operating condition.
22. Heat - This product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or oth-
er products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
FIGURE A
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA
LEAD
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND
CLAMP
GROUND CLAMP
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 3
Precautions (Contd)
4
Before You Start
About Copyright
Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S.patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Moisture Condensation Warning
Moisture condensation may occur inside the unit when it is moved from a cold place to a warm place or after
heating a cold room or under conditions of high humidity. Do not use this unit at least for 2 hours until its
inside gets dry.
Installation Location
For safety and optimum performance of this unit:
Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top of the unit. Do not
place the unit directly on top of the TV.
Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from sources of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid places.
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper heat dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes on the
sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong vibration or strong magnetic fields.
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire
Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it from AC wall outlet. Grasp it by the plug.
If, by accident, water is spilled on this unit, unplug the power cord immediately and take the unit to our
Authorized Service Center for servicing.
Notice for progressive scan outputs
Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may
cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 525p progressive scan outputs, it
is recommended that the user switch the connection to the standard definition output.If there are questions
regarding your TV set compatibility with this model 525p DVD recorder, please contact our customer service
center.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 4
5
Precautions (Contd)
Before You Start
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Dolby Digital Recording
Dolby® Digital Recording enables consumers to record high-quality video with stereo sound on recordable DVD
discs. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for high-
er video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs created using Dolby Digital Recording will play
back on all DVD-Video players.
Note:This is true when the players are compatible with actual recordable DVD discs.
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator
Dolby® Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital sound
tracks at home. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allow-
ing for higher video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using Dolby Digital Stereo
Creator will play back on all DVD-Video players.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 5
Table of Contents
6
Before You Start
Information on Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . .48
One Touch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD . . . .5
0
Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape . . . . . . . .52
Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD .54
Deleting a Program from the Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . .57
Changing the Order of the Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD . . . . . . . .58
Settings for an External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Dubbing from an External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
Protecting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Finalizing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Auto Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Playback Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Basic Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Direct Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Playback from the Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Playback from the Title List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playback from the DVD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playback from the Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Playing back MP3 / WMA Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1
Special Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Resume Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Fast forward / Fast reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Slow forward / Slow reverse Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Time Shift Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Simultaneous Playback and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Step-by-Step Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Variable Replay / Variable Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Random Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Program Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Title / Chapter Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Using SKIP H / G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Using DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Track Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Using SKIP H / G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Using DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Series Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Selecting a Format of Audio and Video . . . . . . . . . .86
Switching Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Switching Audio Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Switching Camera Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Visual Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Guide to Display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Guide to Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Other Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connection to a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connection to a Cable Box or Satellite Box . . . . .
18
Connection to an Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Initial Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
First Time You Turn on the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
OSD Language Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Channel Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Getting Channels Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Adding / Deleting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Auto Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Setting Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
TV Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
TV Aspect Ratio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Recording / Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Information on Supported Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Easy HDD / DVD Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2
Formatting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Selecting the Recording Format Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Formatting a Pre-Recorded Disc (Disc Format) . . . . . . .35
Monitoring the Recording Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Creating Chapter Marks Automatically . . . . . . . . .37
Basic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
One Touch Recording (OTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Editing the Timer Programming Information . . . . . . . . .42
Hints for Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Recording & Playback Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Guide to the Programmed Recordings Screen . . . . . . . .44
Programming a Recording with
the Recording & Playback Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
To Change or Cancel the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Playback and Edit with Programmed Recordings . . . . . .46
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 6
7
Table of Contents (Contd)
Before You Start
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Information on Disc Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Guide to a Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
What are Original List and Playlist? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Available Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Deleting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Deleting Selected Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Deleting all Titles in HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Protecting / Undo Protecting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Editing Title Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Guide to Edit Title Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Deleting a Part of a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Dividing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Combining Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
Moving Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
Chapter Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
Adding Chapter Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Deleting Chapter Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Adding Titles to a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Other Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Tour of the Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Playback Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
1.Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
2. Disc Menu Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
3.Audio Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
4. Subtitle Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.Audio Out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
6.Variable Replay / Skip Speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
7.Angle Icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
8.Progressive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Display Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
1. FL Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
2. Screen Saver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Reset to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
VCR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Guide to Display Information (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . .121
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Basic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Timer Recording / Recording & Navigator . . . . . . . . . .128
Playback / Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Language Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
Español . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 7
8
Before You Start
Features
Recording
This unit allows you to record on the HDD, a DVD-RW
disc (rewritable) and a DVD-R disc (one-time write) as well
as a videotape. You can choose any one for your conve-
nience.
One Touch Recording (OTR)
[ Page 39 (HDD / DVD) or Page 123 (VCR)]
This feature allows you to start the recording right away
with just one-touch. And each press of
REC / OTR
increases the recording time by 30 minutes.
Timer programming up to 32 programs
[ Page 40~41]
You can program the unit to record up to 32 programs
within a one-month period. Daily or weekly repeating
programs can also be programmed.
Recording Monitor [ Page 36]
You can check how the actual recording picture and the
sound will be in the selected Rec Mode before attempting
to record.
Automatic Chapter Marker [ Page 37]
Each recorded title is automatically marked with chapter
marks.
Automatic DVD Menu Making (Video mode only)
[ Page 65]
DVD Menus are made automatically when a Video mode
disc is finalized.
Automatic Playlist Making (VR mode discs and
HDD only)
[ Page 89]
Playlists are automatically copied from the Original List,
so that you can edit titles.
HDD / DVD
HDD / DVD / VCR
160GB Hard Disc [ Pages 29~31]
This unit is equipped with an 160 GB hard disc which
allows you to record up to
340 hours (with SEP mode).
The HDD operates just like a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
Most of the functions which are available with a VR mode
DVD-RW disc can be performed on the HDD, too.
Recording and Playback Navigation
[ Pages 44~46]
You can easily program recording or call and replay a title
which is recorded in the past on the calendar.
Automatic Finalize (Video mode only) [ Page 64]
You can set the disc to be finalized automatically at your
desirable timing.
Relay Recording [ Page 41]
During Timer Recording to a DVD,if the disc runs out of
the space, or if there is no recordable disc in the unit,it
automatically changes the recording media to the HDD.
Left Channel Stereo Recording [ Page 127]
Material that has been recorded to the left channel only
can be automatically copied to the left and right channels
when dubbing.
Dubbing
With this unit, you can enjoy bi-directional dubbing with
HDD, DVD or VCR.
Maximum of x 20 HDD to VR mode DVD-RW disc
dubbing speed (High Speed Dubbing)
[ Pages 54~56]
Up to 20 times high speed dubbing from HDD to VR
mode DVD-RW disc is possible if you use the compatible
disc.
Just Dubbing [ Page 54]
When dubbing from HDD to DVD, if you set the Rec
Mode to
Auto,this unit will automatically select the
most suitable Rec Mode for the dubbing.
HDD / DVD
VCR
DVD
HDD
The following features are available with this unit.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 8
Symbols Used in this Manual
The available functions depend on the type of disc or the
Recording Format. To specify disc type or Recording Format
for each function, we put the following symbols at the
beginning of each function description.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
This unit is not compatible with Multiple Bit
Rate (MBR: a file that contains the same
content encoded at several different
bit rates).
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a new audio devel-
oped by Microsoft
®
in the United States of America.
Symbol
Description
Available to (internal) HDD
Available to VR mode DVD-RW discs
A
vailable to Video mode DVD-RW discs
Available to DVD-R discs
Available to DVD-Video discs
Available to Audio CDs
Available to CD-RW / R discs with
MP3 files
Available to CD-RW / R discs with
WMA files
Available to VHS tapes
Use only tapes marked with
this unit.
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR
DVD-R
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-V
DVD-V
VCRVCR
VCR
MP3MP3
MP3
CDCD
CD
WMAWMA
WMA
HDDHDDHDD
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Before You Start
Features (Contd)
Playback
Simultaneous Playback and Recording [ Page 75]
You can play back a title while recording.
Theater-quality Sound at Home [ Page 19]
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder
that is compatible with Dolby Digital, you can experience
a theater-quality sound environment.
Variable Skip [ Page 76]
You can skip a certain time, which is specified in the
Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while playback.
Variable Replay [ Page 76]
You can skip back a certain time, which is specified in the
Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while playback.
Progressive Scan System [ Page 17]
Unlike the standard definition output system (interlace
scanning), the progressive scan system provides less flick-
ering and higher resolution images than the traditional
scanning system does.
Time Shift Playback [ Page 75]
You can play back from the top of the recording title while
recording without waiting for the recording to end.
Series Search [ Page 84]
You can search for the group of titles made with the same
Periodical Timer Recordings.
Editing
Deleting Titles [ Pages 90~91]
You can delete titles you no longer need.
Making Playlists [ Pages 108~109]
While the Original List remains as it is, you can edit titles
in the Playlist.
Putting Names on Titles
Setting / Clearing Chapter Marks
Dividing / Combining Titles
Deleting Parts of Titles
Moving Titles
Protecting Titles [ Page 93]
You can prevent accidental editing or title erasing.
HDD / DVD
HDD
HDD / DVD
HDD / DVD / VCR
9
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 9
10
Before You Start
Functional Overview
1 POWER: Press to turn the unit on / off.
2 POWER Light: Lights up when the power is on.
3 REC/OTR Light (VCR): Lights up during VCR
recording.
4 Cassette compartment: Place a videotape here.
5 Dubbing Light: Lights up during dubbing.
6 OPEN / CLOSE A * (DVD):Press to open / close
the disc tray.
7 REC/OTR Light (HDD/DVD):Lights up during
HDD/DVD recording.
8 Disc tray:Place a disc here.
9 AUDIO IN (LINE2):Connect the audio output of an
external device here using the supplied audio (L / R)
cable.
10 VIDEO IN (LINE2): Connect the video output of an
external device here using the supplied video cable.
11 S-VIDEO IN (LINE2): Connect the S-Video output
of an external device here using a commercially avail-
able S-Video cable.
12 RESET: Press with a sharp pointed object to restart
the unit when it freezes. Also refer to the Note below.
13 REC / OTR I (HDD / DVD):Press once to start a
basic recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR (One
Touch Recording). Each press increases the recording
time by 30 minutes up to 8 hours.
14 PLAY B * (HDD / DVD):
Press to start playback or resume playback.
15 STOP C * (HDD / DVD):
Press to stop playback,recording or dubbing.
16 Device Select Buttons / Indicators:
VCR
: Press to activate the VCR. Lights up when VCR
is selected.
HDD: Press to activate the HDD. Lights up when
HDD is selected.
DVD : Press to activate the DVD. Lights up when DVD
is selected.
17 DUBBING HDDDVD: Press to start One Touch
Dubbing from HDD to DVD.
18 DUBBING VCRDVD: Press to start One Touch
Dubbing from VCR to DVD.
19 CHANNEL K / L:Press to change the channel.
20 Front Panel Display: Shows information and mes-
sages.
21 Remote control sensor: Receives signals from the
remote control.
22 REC / OTR I (VCR): Press once to start a basic
recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR (One
Touch Recording). Each press increases the recording
time by 30 minutes up to 8 hours.
23 PLAY B (VCR): Press to start playback.
24 F.FWD D (VCR): Press to fast forward or fast
search.
25 REW E (VCR): Press to rewind or rewind search.
26 STOP / EJECT CA(VCR): Press to eject the
videotape. Press to stop recording or playback.
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
1
4
2 6* 8
9101113
14*
15*
18
1721
22
1923
24
25
26 16
12
3
5 7
20
*
The unit can also be turned on by
pressing these buttons.
Front Panel
Note
After pressing RESET,
The settings for the items listed below will be lost;
-Clock Setting
-Timer Program Setting
-Resume point
The settings for the item listed below will not be
lost, but need to be set again.
-Channel Setting
All other settings will remain memorized.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 10
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
11
Before You Start
Functional Overview (Contd)
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
1 789
2
3456
101112
1 AC Power Cord:Connect to a standard AC outlet to
supply power to this unit.
2 S-VIDEO IN (LINE 1): Connect the S-Video output
of an external equipment here using a commercially
available an S-Video cable.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD):
Connect the component video input of a TV monitor,
AV receiver, or other equipment here using a commer-
cially available component video cable.
4 AUDIO IN (LINE 1):Connect an external equip-
ment here using a supplied audio cable.
5 AUDIO OUT: Connect the audio input of a TV moni-
tor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the
supplied audio (L / R) cable.
6 TV ANTENNA IN: Use to connect an antenna.
7 TV ANTENNA OUT: Use to connect an antenna
cable to pass the signal from the TV ANTENNA IN to
your TV monitor.
8 VIDEO OUT: Connect the video input of a TV moni-
tor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the
supplied video cable.
9 VIDEO IN (LINE 1): Connect the video output of an
external device here using the supplied video cable.
10 S-VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD): Connect the S-Video
input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment
here using a commercially available S-Video cable.
11 AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD):Connect the audio
input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment
here using the supplied audio (L / R) cable.
12 COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD):
Connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder or oth-
er equipment with a coaxial digital input jack with a dig-
ital coaxial cable.
Note: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear
panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
Rear Panel
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:24 PM Page 11
12
Before You Start
Functional Overview (Contd)
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
456
PQRS
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
TUV
SPACE
SETUP
MENU/LIST
DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE
REPLAY
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
PAUSESTOP
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
WXYZ
78
0
9
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10*
11
12
13
14
15
16
17*
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27*
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
1 POWER:Turns the unit on / off.
2 Number Buttons:
Press to select channel numbers.
Press to select a title / chapter / track on display.
Press to enter setting values.
Press to enter the index number / desired time to
search in VCR mode.
3 PROGRAM RECORDINGS: Press to call up the
Recording & Playback Navigation Screen.
4 SETUP: Press to display the Setup Menu. The unit
switches to the HDD / DVD mode when this button is
pressed.
5 MENU / LIST (HDD / DVD):
Displays the Disc Menu.
Switch the Original List and the Playlist.
6 Cursor / / / :Selects items or settings.
7 DISPLAY: Displays the on-screen menu.
8 SKIP j / i (HDD / DVD):
During playback, press to skip to the previous / next
chapter or track. Or when playback is paused, press to
play back in forward / reverse step by step.
9 REV E:
(HDD / DVD) During playback, press to play back in
fast reverse. Or when playback is paused, press to play
back in slow reverse.
(VCR) Press to rewind the videotape or to view the
picture rapidly in reverse during the playback mode.
10 PLAY B * : Press to start or resume playback.
If you press this button when the power is off, the unit will
be turned on and the playback will start automatically.
If the resume point has been set,the playback will start
from the resume point.
11 SLOW (VCR): During playback, press to view the
videotape in slow motion.
12 REC MONITOR (HDD / DVD):Press to check the
picture and the audio qualities for recording.
13 REC MODE: Press to select the Rec Mode.
14 DUBBING MENU: Press to display the Dubbing
Menu. The unit switches to the HDD / DVD mode
when this button is pressed.
15 TIMER PROG.: Press to display the Timer Program
List. The unit switches to the HDD / DVD mode when
this button is pressed.
Remote Control
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:25 PM Page 12
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
13
Before You Start
Functional Overview (Contd)
16 INPUT SELECT: Press to select an input device.
17 OPEN / CLOSE EJECT A (DVD / VCR) *: Press to
open / close the disc tray or eject a videotape.
18 CHANNEL / :
Press to change the channel up / down.
(VCR) Press to adjust the tracking during playback or
in slow motion of the videotape. Also while playback is
in still mode, you can adjust the picture blurred verti-
cally.
19 CLEAR:
(HDD / DVD) Press to clear the information once
entered, etc.
(DVD) Press to erase the track number entered in the
program playlist for a CD.
(VCR) Press to reset the tape counter.
20 AUDIO:During playback, press to change the AUDIO
Setting.
21 TOP MENU (HDD / DVD): Displays the Top Menu.
22 ENTER: Press to confirm or select menu items.
23 RETURN :Press to return to the previously dis-
played Menu Screen.
24 VARIABLE SKIP (HDD / DVD):
Skips by the set in advance.
25 VARIABLE REPLAY (HDD / DVD):
Replays by the set in advance.
26 FWD D:
(HDD / DVD) During playback, press to play back in
fast forward. Or when playback is paused, press to play
back in slow forward.
(VCR) Press to rapidly advance the videotape or view
the picture rapidly in forward during playback.
27 STOP C * :Press to stop playback, recording, or dub-
bing.
28 PAUSE F: Press to pause playback or recording.
Device Select Buttons:
29 VCR: Press to activate the remote control in VCR
mode. (See page
16.)
Press to activate the VCR.
30 HDD: Press to activate the remote control in
HDD mode. (See page
16.)
Press to activate the HDD.
31 DVD: Press to activate the remote control in
DVD mode. (See page
16.)
Press to activate the DVD.
32 REC / OTR (VCR):
Press once to start a basic VCR recording. Press
repeatedly to start a One Touch Recording in VCR
mode.
33 REC / OTR (HDD):
Press once to start a basic HDD recording. Press
repeatedly to start a One Touch Recording in HDD
mode.
34 REC / OTR (DVD):
Press once to start a basic DVD recording. Press
repeatedly to start a One Touch Recording in DVD
mode.
35 SEARCH MODE (VCR): Press to call up the index
or Time Search Menu.
*
In HDD / DVD mode the unit can also be
turned on by pressing these buttons.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:25 PM Page 13
14
Before You Start
Functional Overview (Contd)
Display message
Appears when the disc tray is
opening.
Appears when a disc is loaded on
the disc tray.
Appears when the disc tray is
closing.
PM
TIME
SHIFT
DB
VCR
HDD
DVD
CD R W
4
5
6
2
3
7
1
P-SCAN
1 PM : Appears in the afternoon with the Clock Display.
2 TIME SHIFT :
Appears during the Time Shift Playback.
3 Title / Track and Chapter mark
: Appears when indicating a title / track number.
: Appears when indicating a chapter number.
4 Current status of the unit
: Appears when Timer Recording is in Standby,
or is proceeding.
Disappears when all the Timer Recordings are
finished.
P-SCAN :
Appears when the picture output is progressive scan.
: Appears when a videotape is in the unit.
DB : Lights up during a dubbing process.
5 I HDD: Lights up during recording with HDD.
I DVD : Lights up during recording with DVD.
I VCR :Lights up during recording with VCR.
6 Disc type and current status of the unit
CD
: Appears when an audio CD or a disc with
MP3 / WMA files is on the disc tray.
R
: Appears when a DVD-R disc is loaded on the
disc tray.
RW
: Appears when a DVD-RW disc is loaded on
the disc tray.
7 Displays the following
Played-back time
Current title / chapter / track number
Recording time
Clock
Channel number
VCR tape counter
Remaining time for a One Touch Recording
Front Panel Display
Appears when the unit is
turning on.
Appears when the unit is
turning off.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:25 PM Page 14
15
Before You Start
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Functional Overview (Contd)
Display Example :
Press DISPLAY once to show the information on the current
operation mode.
Press
DISPLAY one more time to see more information, and to
call up the icons for the available features.
Guide to Display Information
The Display Menu gives you information on the play-
back status of the HDD or DVD.
Press DISPLAY.
Each section includes the information as listed below:
1 Device mode
2 Current title number / total number of the titles
Current chapter number / total number of the chapters
Elapsed playback time of the current title / total
time of the title
3 Playback status
Name of the current title
4 Playback status icon
5 Icons for the available features:
Using / , select a menu, then press
ENTER.
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
CDCD
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Example:Advanced Menu
Using / , select an Item to set,then press ENTER.
Sub menu or option window will appear.
Using / / / , make your desirable selection, then
press
ENTER.
DVD Recording FormatDVD Recording Format
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
CDCD
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
CDCD
EnglishEnglish
Fraçaisais
OSD LanguageOSD Language
EspaEspañolol
Note
This is an example screen only for explanation.
Displayed items varies depending on the actual mode.
The information will not appear under the following
conditions;
- When there is no title recorded in the HDD/DVD.
- During recording (DVD only).
Closed Caption will not be displayed while the
Display Information is shown on the screen.
DVD MODE
8 / 8 1 / 4 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
DVD Play AAA
TC
4
2
1
3
DVD MODE 8 / 8 1 / 4 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
TC
5
: Search
: Audio
: Subtitle
: Angle
: Repeat
: Noise Reduction
: Zoom
Guide to Setup Menu
This unit uses the following on-screen menu for most opera-
tions. It allows you to change the settings of the unit to match
the environment, and to customise the settings as you prefer.
Easy Setting Menu and Advanced Menu are avail-
able.
Easy Setting Menu consists of those frequently needed.
You can make all required settings using
Advanced Menu.
How to use Setup Menus :
Press SETUP to display Easy Setting Menu or
Advanced Menu. Choose either menu using / ,
then press
ENTER.
CD Menu is available only when a CD is loaded.
Available menus vary among discs.
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:25 PM Page 15
Before You Start
Functional Overview (Contd)
Using a remote control
Keep in mind the following when using the remote control:
Make sure that there is no obstacle between the remote
control and the remote sensor of the unit.
Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sun-
light or fluorescent light shines on the remote sensor of
the unit.
Remote control for different devices can interfere with
each other. Avoid using remote controls for other
equipment located close to the unit.
Replace the batteries when you notice a fall-off of the
operating range of the remote control.
The maximum operable ranges (approximate) from the
unit are as follows.
- Straight line: 23 feet (7 m)
- Either side of center:
16 feet (5 m) within 30°
- Above:
16 feet (5 m) within 15°
- Below:
10 feet (3 m) within 30°
Installing batteries in the remote control
Install two AA-size batteries (supplied), matching their
polarity to those indicated inside the battery compartment
of the remote control.
Battery use and care
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leak-
age and bursting. Please follow the instruction below:
Do not mix new and old batteries together.
Do not use different kinds of batteries together.
Although they may look similar, different batteries may
have different voltages.
Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery
match the indications in the battery compartment.
Remove batteries from equipment that is not going to
be used for a month or more.
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or public rules for environ-
mental protection that apply in your country or area.
Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or disas-
semble batteries.
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
23 feet (7 m)
16 feet (5 m)
(30°)
16 feet (5 m)
(30°)
16 feet (5 m)
(15°)
10 feet (3 m)
(30°)
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
456
PQRS
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
TUV
SPACE
SETUP
MENU/LIST
DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE
REPLAY
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
PAUSESTOP
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
WXYZ
78
0
9
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
VCR Button
HDD Button
DVD Button
VCR HDD DVD
DVD Button / Indicator
HDD Button / Indicator
Device Select Buttons /
Indicators
VCR Button / Indicator
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
2
1
3
Switching HDD / DVD / VCR modes
Because this product is a combination of a HDD, DVD, and
VCR recorder, you must select first which component you
wish to operate.
HDD mode
Press HDD on the remote control.
(Verify that the HDD indicator is lit.)
DVD mode
Press DVD on the remote control.
(Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.)
VCR mode
Press VCR on the remote control.
(Verify that the VCR indicator is lit.)
Note
Pressing the device select button on the front panel
DOES NOT switch the device mode of the remote
control. You MUST select the correct device mode
on the remote control.
If you press
REC / OTR of each device, recording
starts in its device mode.
When the buttons listed below are pressed, the unit
switches to the HDD / DVD mode.
-
TIMER PROG.
- SETUP
- DUBBING MENU
When the button listed below is pressed, the unit
switches to the HDD mode.
-
PROGRAM RECORDINGS
Other Overviews
16
4380_001-016.qx3 05.11.16 2:25 PM Page 16
17
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Connections
Connection to a TV
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD/VCR
IN
OUT
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
D
D/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
PB/CB
Y
PR/CR
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
VIDEO IN
Choose one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of the equipment you possess.
AUDIO OUT
TV
Basic Audio
Audio cable
(supplied)
This unit
These jacks are useful only in
HDD / DVD mode.
/
DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
OUT
HDD/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
(Back of TV)
Plug in the AC power
cord of this unit.
or
Cable
TV signal
or
Cable
TV signal
Connect
Disconnect
Antenna
Antenna
(Back of this unit)
(Back of TV)
RF cable
(supplied)
Connect
3
2
1
4
Note
Connect this unit directly to the TV.
The HDD/DVD and VCR is sending each video signals simultaneously.
You will not be able to hear all of the sound being output by this unit if you use the video/audio cables (supplied) to
a monaural TV that has only one audio input jack.
Be sure that the colours of the jacks and plugs match up when connecting the cable.
The S-VIDEO OUT and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks are only useful for HDD/DVD playback.
If your TV is compatible with the Progressive Scan System, and you want to utilize its feature, use COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT connection. If you use any other connection such as VIDEO OUT or S-VIDEO OUT, the picture will
not be output in the Progressive Scan mode but in the standard output mode (Interlace).
Basic Audio Connection Video Connections
(
VV
= Available,
-
= Not Available)
OR
TV
This unit
If your TV is compatible with 525 or 625 progressive scanning and you want to enjoy the high quality picture;
Use COMPONENT VIDEO OUT connection, set the Progressive to On in the Setup Menu (see page 117), and
make sure
P.SCAN indication is on the Front Panel Display.
If
your TV is not compatible with Progressive Scan
;
If your TV is not compatible with progressive scanning, set Progressiveto Off in the Setup Menu, and make
sure no
P.SCAN indication is on the Front Panel Display.
OR
(Compatible with
the Progressive
Scan mode.)
Note
You can connect to TV
with A/V cables or RF
cable.
Picture Quality
Basic Good Best
HDD/DVD
VV VV VV
VCR
VV
(required)
--
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Component
video cable
(commercially
available)
VIDEO OUT
Video cable
(supplied)
S-Video cable
(commercially
available)
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 17
18
Connections
Connection to a TV (Contd)
Connection to a Cable Box or Satellite Box
O
UT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
O
UT
L
R
D
/VCR
RF cable
(supplied)
(Back of this unit)
IN
OUT
E
(Back of TV)
Cable TV signal
(Cable box or
Satellite box)
Note to the Cable TV System Installer:
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installers attention to Article 820-40 of the
National Electrical Code, which provides guidelines for proper groundingin particular, specifying that the
cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable
entry as possible.
This connection allows you to view or record a scrambled channel. With this connection, channels cannot be changed on
this unit. You can view or record ONLY the channels you have selected on the cable box or the satellite box.
Read the instruction manual of the cable box or the satellite box also.
After you have completed connections
Turn your TV to the appropriate external input channel (usually near channel 0) in order to view the pictures output
from this unit on the TV. To find the external input channel press the channel button on your TVs remote repeatedly until
the DVD recorders picture appears.External input channels may vary depending on the connection you made. Check
your TV owners manual for details.
Admiral
Curtis Mathis
GE
Hitachi
JVC
Kenwood
LXI-Series
Magnavox
AUX
LINE1, LINE2, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93
INPUT, TV / VCR, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93
INPUT, AUX
VIDEO, VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3
AUX
00
AUX CHANNEL
Input Mode Names for Common TV Brands (Example)
Panasonic
RCA
Samsung
Sanyo
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Zenith
TV/VIDEO
INPUT, TV / VCR, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93
TV/VIDEO
VIDEO
00
VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3
TV / GAME
00
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 18
19
Connections
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
HDD/DVD
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Connection to an Audio System
When you change the connections,all devices should be turned off.
Refer to the operation manual accompanying external devices for more information.
AUDIO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
HDD/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
Stereo system
AUDIO
Method 1
Analog audio
input jacks
Digital audio
input jack
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Method 2
Audio cable
(supplied)
Digital Coaxial
cable
(commercially
available)
Dolby Digital decoder,
MD deck or DAT deck
This unit
* To complete these settings.(See pages 115116.)
If output is Dolby Digital encod-
ed audio, connect to a Dolby
Digital decoder.
Unless connected to a Dolby
Digital decoder.
Connecting to an MD deck or
DAT deck.
-
-
-
Stream
PCM
PCM
Initial Setup >Playback >Audio Out >
PCM
Dolby Digital
Setting
Connection
Note
By connecting this unit to a Multi-channel Dolby
Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby
Digital 5.
1 channel surround sound as heard in the
movie theaters.
The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital 5.
1
channel surround format cannot be recorded as
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.
Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may
generate noise distortion and may also damage the
speakers.
or
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 19
20
Initial Setups
First Time You on the Unit
Right after the purchase of the unit, do the Initialize
Setting by taking the following procedures.
This menu may not appear if you have already turned
on the unit.
1
After making all the necessary connections, turn on
the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page
18.)
2
Press POWER. The Display shown below will
appear.
These menus may not appear if you have already
turned on the unit. If you have already turned on
the unit before, refer to OSD Language Setting on
page 2
1 to select a language for the on-screen
displays and the menus,Channel Setting on page 22
to setup the channels, and Clock Setting on page 24
to set the clock.
If you press
PLAY B at this point, English will
be selected automatically and the steps
3 and 4 can
be skipped.
3
Press / to select English,Français
(French)
or Español (Spanish). Then, press
ENTER. The following screen will automatically
appear and the Auto Channel Preset will start.
If you like to skip this step, press
RETURN as
soon as the search begins.
4
After Auto Channel Preset is finished,the Auto Clock
function will be activated automatically and the cor-
rect time will be set.
Auto Presetuto Preset
EnglishEnglish
Français
OSD LanguageOSD Language
EspaEspañol
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
POWER
ENTER
RETURN
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 20
21
Initial Setups
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
OSD Language Setting
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
If you have already set the OSD Language when you first turned
on the unit, you can skip this section.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
3
Using / , select OSD Language.
Press
ENTER.
OSD Language Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select a language. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
The default setting is
English.
5
Press SETUP to exit.
EnglishEnglish
Fraçais
OSD LanguageOSD Language
EspaEspañol
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 21
22
Initial Setups
Channel Setting
Getting Channels Automatically
If you have already set the channels when you first turned on
the unit, you can skip this section.
After resetting the settings or whenever you move to a new
area,we recommend you to program available channels in
your area with the following procedures.
1
Press POWER.
2
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page
18.)
3
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Initial Setup.
Press
ENTER.
5
Using / , select Channel Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
TV ATV Audio Selectudio Select
ManManual Presetual Preset
Auto Presetuto Preset
Channel SettingChannel Setting
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
TV's remote
control
*This button can
be labeled as
INPUT, AUX, etc.
VIDEO/TV
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
POWER
SETUP
ENTER
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 22
23
Initial Setups
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Channel Setting (Contd)
Adding / Deleting Channels
The channels you no longer receive or seldom watch can be
deleted from the memory. You can also add channels manu-
ally into memory.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup
Press ENTER.
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
6
Using / ,select Auto Preset. Press ENTER.
The unit will start getting channels available in your area.
Wait for several minutes for channel scanning to finish.
After Auto Preset has stopped:
Use CHANNEL / or the Number
Buttons
to change the channel.
When you use
the Number Buttons, press 0
first for a single digit number.
Use
INPUT SELECT to select an external
input channel (
L1” or L2) of this unit.
Auto Presetuto Preset
3
Using / , select Channel Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Manual Preset.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
5
Using / , select the channel number to add or
delete.
Use / or CHANNEL / to change the
channels one by one, or use
the Number Buttons
to select the channel directly
.
6
Using / , select Add or Delete.
Press
ENTER.
The channel number will be added or deleted from
the channel memory. Then, the next channel
number will appear so that you can continue adding
or deleting channels.
7
Press SETUP to exit.
AddAdd
CH 1CH 1
DeleteDelete
AddAdd
CH 1CH 1
DeleteDelete
TV ATV Audio Selectudio Select
ManManual Presetual Preset
Auto Presetuto Preset
Channel SettingChannel Setting
Note
External Input Channels (L1or L2) cannot be
skipped.
You cannot change the channel while the unit (HDD,
VCR or DVD) is in the recording, OTR or Timer
Recording mode.
If the auto presetting is cancelled during presetting,
some of the channels not yet preset may not be
received.
The selection will depend on how you receive the TV
channels.
To cancel the Auto Preset during scanning:
Press
RETURN .
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 23
24
Initial Setups
Clock Setting
If you have already set the Clock when you first turned on the
unit, you can skip this section.
Set the clock before you try Timer Recording. If Public
Broadcasting Service (PBS) is available in your area, follow
the Auto Clock Setting below. If not,refer to Manual Clock
Setting on page 25.
Make sure the antenna / cable TV connections are correct.
You cannot set the clock while the unit is in the recording,
OTR or Timer Recording mode.
Auto Clock Setting
If this unit is connected to a Cable Box or Satellite Box,
select the local PBS station to set the clock automatically.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup. Press ENTER.
3
Using / , select Clock Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Clock Setting Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Auto Clock Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Auto Clocuto Clock Settingk Setting
OffOff
Auto
ManManual
DaDaylight Saylight Saving TimeTime
Auto Clocuto Clock Settingk Setting
ClocClock Settingk Setting
ClocClock Settingk Setting
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 24
25
Initial Setups
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Clock Setting (Contd)
Manual Clock Setting
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
3
Using / , select Clock Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Clock Setting Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Clock Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Clock Setting Window will appear.
5
Using / , move to the item your want to set, and
using / , change the setting to suite your prefer-
ence.
6
When all the information is entered, press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Although seconds are not displayed, they will be
counted from zero.
7
Press SETUP to exit.
ClocClock Settingk Setting
MARMAR / / AMAM:
(Tue)ue)
15 20052005 11 2626
DaDaylight Saylight Saving TimeTime
Auto Clocuto Clock Settingk Setting
ClocClock Settingk Setting
ClocClock Settingk Setting
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
5
If you do not know the PBS channel number
in your area :
Using / , select Auto.PressENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
If you know the PBS channel number
in your area :
Using / , select Manual. Press ENTER.
Input window will appear.
Using
the Number Buttons or / , enter the
PBS channel number. Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
If you want to set the clock manually and to
cancel the Auto Clock Setting :
Using / , select Off. Press ENTER.
The Auto Clock Setting will be canceled.
The default setting is
Auto.
6
Press SETUP to exit.
7
Press POWER to turn off the unit.
This unit will search for the clock time only when
the power is off. Leave it off for several minutes to
give the unit a time to set the clock.
CHCH 1
Set Channel NoSet Channel No.
Note
The clock may set itself automatically after you
connect the antenna / cable signal to this unit and
plug in the power cord. In this case, the current time
will appear on the Front Panel Display.
If the current time is not displayed or the displayed
clock time is not correct, set the clock manually.
Note
Your clock setting will be lost if either there is a
power failure or this unit has been unplugged for
more than 30 seconds.
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 25
26
Initial Setups
Clock Setting (Contd)
Setting Daylight Saving Time
When Daylight Saving Time is on, the clock will automatically
move forward one hour at 2:00 a.m on the first Sunday in
April and move back one hour at 2:00 a.m on the last
Sunday in October.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup. Press ENTER.
3
Using / , select Clock Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Clock Setting Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Daylight Saving Time.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
5
Using / , select On to activate the Daylight
Saving Time. Press
ENTER.
If you do not want to use the Daylight Saving Time
feature select
Off.
The default setting is
On.
6
Press SETUP to exit.
OnOn
OffOff
DaDaylight Saylight Saving TimeTime
DaDaylight Saylight Saving TimeTime
Auto Clocuto Clock Settingk Setting
ClocClock Settingk Setting
ClocClock Settingk Setting
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 26
27
Initial Setups
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
TV Audio Setting
You can select an audio channel to output from TV.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
3
Using / , select Channel Setting.
Press
ENTER.
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select TV Audio Select.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
5
Using / , select Stereo or SAP.
Press
ENTER.
Stereo:
Outputs main-audio.
SAP (Secondary Audio Program):
Outputs sub-audio.
Refer to the item in Glossary on page
134 for
more information.
The default setting is
Stereo.
6
Press SETUP to exit.
SAPSAP
StereoStereo
TV ATV Audio Selectudio Select
TV ATV Audio Selectudio Select
ManManual Presetual Preset
Auto Presetuto Preset
Channel SettingChannel Setting
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
DISPLAY RETURN
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
Note
This unit CANNOT record in both stereo and SAP
(Secondary Audio Program) at the same time.
SAP (Secondary Audio Program);
SAP is the Secondary Audio Program which is usually
used as an alternate in bilingual broadcasting, such as
a broadcasting in Spanish.The SAP signal is delivered
using the sub-audio channel.While the main-audio
channel has 2 channels for L & R, the sub-audio
channel has only
1 channel.Therefore, the SAP will
always be broadcasted in monaural sound (outputting
the same sound from the left and the right speakers).
Notes on TV channel audio
If you want to record a TV program available in second
audio or stereo on HDD, DVD-RW/R discs or videotape,
you have to select either
Stereoor SAP
beforehand. Refer to the following table to check the
appropriate setting.
You can only play back the disc in second audio if a
TV program is available in second audio and you set
TV Audio Select to SAP.
Broadcast audio
Selected
HDD/DVD/VCR
Main-audio Sub-audio audio recording
channel channel
STEREO SAP STEREO
STEREO NONE STEREO
MONO SAP MONO
MONO NONE MONO
STEREO SAP SAP
STEREO NONE STEREO
MONO SAP SAP
MONO NONE MONO
Stereo
SAP
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 27
28
Initial Setups
TV Aspect Ratio Setting
You can select the TV aspect ratio to match the formats of
what you are playing back on the unit and your TV screen
(4:3 standard or
16:9 widescreen TV).
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
If Advanced Menuis displayed, proceed to step 3.
2
Using / , select Advanced Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Initial Setup. Press ENTER.
4
Using / , select Playback. Press ENTER.
Playback Menu will appear.
5
Using / , select TV Aspect.PressENTER.
Option window will appear.
6
Using / , select a desired option. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
The default setting is
4:3 Letter Box.
7
Press SETUP to exit.
16:9 16:9 WideWide
4:3 Pan & Scanan & Scan
4:3 Letter Bo4:3 Letter Box
TV AspectTV Aspect
Angle IconAngle Icon
Variable Replale Replay/Skip Speedy/Skip Speed
Audio Outudio Out
Subtitle LanguageSubtitle Language
Audio Language
Disc MenDisc Menu Languageu Language
Parental Locarental Lock
TV AspectTV Aspect
PlaPlaybacyback
ProgProgressive
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MDVD Menuenu
HDD MHDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
Note
If you have a standard TV:
Select
4:3 Letter Box for full-length picture with
black bars on the top and bottom of the screen.
Select
4:3 Pan & Scan for a full-height picture
with both sides trimmed.
If you have a widescreen TV:
Select
16:9 Wide.
4380_017-028.qx3 05.11.16 2:26 PM Page 28
29
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Media types
DVD-RW VR DVD-RW Video
You want to
Record TV programs
Reuse by deleting unwanted contents
Edit recorded contents
Edit/Record from connected equipment
Copy discs for distribution
Play on other HDD/DVD/ VCR equipment
*1
*1
DVD-RW VR DVD-RW Video
Features
Recording
Rewritable Yes Yes
Can create chapters at fixed intervals (auto.)
Ye s Ye s
Can create chapters wherever you like (manual)
Ye s N o
Can record 16:9 size pictures Yes
Ye s
Ye s
Can record copy-once programs No
Editing
Can perform basic edit functions Yes Yes
Can perform advanced edit functions (Playlist edit)
Ye s
HDD VCR
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s N o
No
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
No
No
Ye s
No
No
*1
VR mode DVD-RW can only be played on DVD equipment that is VR compatible.
*2 Programs can be recorded from other equipment, but they cannot be edited.
*1
CPRM compatible disc only.
Note: For details of the above functions and implied restrictions, see the explanations inside the manual.
DVD-R
: Most suitable. : Can be used. : Some functions are limited. : Cannot be used.
HDD VCR
DVD-R
*2
*1
Information on Supported Media
Information
This unit can record on DVD-RW discs and DVD-R discs.
DVD-R discs allow you to record programs only once, and
the recorded contents cannot be erased.
DVD-RW discs allow you to record programs repeatedly,
and the recorded contents can be erased.
There are 2 recording format,VR mode and Video mode, for
DVD-RW discs while there is only one recording format,
Video mode, for DVD-R discs.
VR mode is the basic recording format for the DVD-RW
disc. It is suited for editing the recorded contents,and playable
only on the DVD-RW compatible unit.VR mode disc has both
Original List and Playlist, and creates the Playlist automatically
when programs (titles) are recorded.
Video mode is the same recording format as those DVD-
Video discs purchased locally.
Video mode disc can be played back on most DVD players.
Although the available editing menus are limited compare to
the VR mode disc, you still can add or delete the recordings,
or edit the contents before finalizing.Video mode disc has
only Original List, and creates the DVD Menu automatically
when it is finalized.
Logo
Attributes
8 cm / 12 cm, single-sided, single layer disc
Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode):
600 minutes (4.7 GB) (for 12 cm)
180 minutes (1.4 GB) (for 8 cm)
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Recordable disc
Discs which can be used with this recorder:
•DVD-R disc: up to
16x (4x or 8x disc is recom-
mended)
DVD-RW disc: 2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended)
Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this
recorder:
MAXELL DVD-R disc
4x
TDK DVD-RW disc 2x
JVC DVD-RW disc
4x
MITSUBISHI DVD-R disc 8x
DVD players with are capable of playing DVD-RW disc
recorded in VR mode.
Disc type Disc format
Video mode
VR mode
Video mode
Functions
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
Playback, recording, Original
List / Playlist editing
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD- RW
VR
DVD-RW
DVD- RW
Video
DVD-R
DVD- R
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.22 10:03 AM Page 29
30
Recording / Dubbing
Note
This recorder cannot record on CD-RW or CD-R
discs.
DVD-RW/R discs and CD-RW/R discs recorded on a
personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder may
not be played back if the disc is damaged or dirty or
if there is dirt of condensation on the player’s lens.
If you record on a disc using a personal computer,
there are cases in which it may not be played back
because of the settings of the application software
used to create the disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format. (Check with the software
publisher for more detailed information.)
Discs recorded in Video mode on this unit cannot
record additionally using other DVD recorders.
Since the recording is made by the variable bit rate
(VBR) method, the actual remaining time for
recording may be a little bit shorter than the
remaining time displayed on the OSD, depending on
the picture you are recording.
Playlist will be created automatically when recording
to VR mode DVD-RW disc and HDD.
About DVD+RW/R discs
You cannot use DVD+RW/R disc for recording.
Only the finalized Video mode DVD+RW/R discs can
be played back on this unit.
If you insert a blank DVD+RW/R disc, an error
message will appear.
The performance of DVD+RW/R discs on this unit is
not guaranteed.
Information on Supported Media (Contd)
Rec Mode
You can select a Rec Mode among 6 options, and the
recording time and the picture/audio quality of recorded
material depends on the Rec Mode you select.
To select the Rec Mode you prefer, press
REC MODE.
The information of the selected media (internal HDD or
DVD) will be displayed.
Press
REC MODE repeatedly to change the Rec Mode.
The speed will be changed each time you press it with the
following order:
The information will disappear in a few seconds,or press
DISPLAY to exit.
* The recording time is an estimate and actual recording
time may differ.
* Audio and video quality decreases as the recording time
becomes longer.
* Each time you press
REC MODE, remaining recording
time is displayed.
XP SP LP
EPSLPSEP
HDD CH7
XP 17:32
(poor)
(good)
Rec
Mode
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Recording
time
18 min
36 min
72 min
108 min
144 min
180 min
Video / Sound
Quality
Disc Size
8 cm Disc
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
60 min
120 min
240 min
360 min
480 min
600 min
34 H
68 H
136 H
204 H
272 H
340 H
12 cm Disc
HDD
(Internal)
(poor)
(poor)
(good)
(good)
Indicates the remaining time of the disc when
recorded with the selected Rec Mode.
Restrictions on recording
You cannot record copy protected discs or tapes using this
unit. Copy protected material includes DVD-Video and
some satellite broadcasts.
If copy protected material is encountered during a record-
ing, recording will be paused or stop automatically and an
error message will be displayed on-screen.
Copy-once programs can only be recorded on the HDD or
on a CPRM compatible VR mode DVD-RW disc (see below).
Maximum Recordable numbers of title /
chapters
HDD:
300 titles per each Playlist and Original List
999 chapters per title
VR mode DVD:
99 titles per each Playlist and Original List
999 chapters per each Playlist and
Original List
Video mode DVD:
99 titles per disc
99 chapters per title
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 30
31
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Information on Supported Media (Contd)
Information on copy control
Some satellite broadcasts include copy protected informa-
tion. For their recording,refer to the following.
Making discs playable on other DVD player
(Finalize)
After recording, you must finalize the disc in order to play
on other units. (See page 63.)
* For Video mode discs, the finalization is required.
* For VR mode discs, the finalization is recommended.
* For the information on videotapes, refer to VCR
functions on pages
121-127.
Disc type / format
Copy
-free
Copy
-once
Copy-
prohibited
Recordable
Not Recordable
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-R
DVD-R
ver.1.1,1.2
ver.1.1,1.2 CPRM compatible
ver.1.1,1.2
ver.1.1,1.2 CPRM compatible
ver.2.0
VCRVCR
VCR
HDDHDDHDD
What is CPRM?
This is a format used to record copy-once programs.
By recording coded data on the area of discs that ordi-
nary writing software cannot write, it prevents copy-
once programs from being recorded repeatedly on dif-
ferent media.
This unit is CPRM compatible, which means that you
can record copy-once broadcast programs, but then
you cannot make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on the HDD or VR mode
DVD-RW disc, and CPRM recordings can only be
played back on DVD players that are compatible with
CPRM.
This Unit DVD player
Not Playable
Playable
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
About HDD
HDD is a special component which has high recording den-
sity and is suited for long-time recording or high-speed cue-
ing but by contrast,has many factors which can cause break-
age. Use HDD on the premise that you should dub the
recorded programs to a DVD disc or a videotape to protect
your precious videos.
HDD is a temporary storage location.
HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded
contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage location
until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them
to a DVD disc or a videotape.
Be sure to dub (back up) data promptly if you
find abnormalities in HDD.
If there is mechanical trouble with the HDD, grinding or
other sounds may be heard or blocky noise may appear on
the image. If you continue to use as it is, deterioration may
continue and eventually the HDD may not be used at all.If
you notice these symptoms of a failing HDD, promptly dub
the data to a DVD disc or a videotape.
When an HDD fails, recovery of recorded content (data)
may be impossible.
About the remaining capacity of HDD record-
ing time:
In recording to HDD,the Remaining Capacity Display may
differ from the actual recordable time as this unit adopts
Variable Bit Rate encoding,which varies the recording (stor-
age) amount of data in conformity with the information
amount of video. Before recording to the HDD, ensure
there is sufficient space on the HDD by deleting unneces-
sary titles in advance. (Remaining capacity will not increase if
you only delete Playlists.)
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 31
32
Recording / Dubbing
Easy HDD / DVD Recording
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to the internal HDD or to DVDs.
Note: Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly.
Step 1:
Choose a disc type & the Recording Format. (Only If you are recording to DVD.)
There are several types of recordable DVDs to choose from. Choose a recordable disc
type based on your playback / recording / editing needs. Refer to ‘Information on Supported
Media’ on pages 29-3
1 to determine which disc type is most suited for your needs. Also,
refer to page 34 to set the Recording Format for your disc.
This unit can record on the type of discs on the right.
or
Step 2: Preparing the media
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
CHANNEL
123
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
4 Close the disc tray.1 Turn on the unit.
It may take a while to
load the disc.
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
3 Open the disc tray, and
place a disc on the tray.
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR
HDD DVD
REC/OTR
REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
If you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, Auto Format will start automatically.
2 Select the device you want to use.
(If you are recording to the HDD,
skip to step 3 on the next page.)
Continue on the next page.
Note
HDD is a temporary storage location.
HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage
location until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.17 10:15 AM Page 32
33
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Step 5: Start Recording.
When recording to the HDD:
Press
REC / OTR (HDD).
When recording to the DVD:
Press
REC / OTR (DVD).
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAU S ESLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAU S E
or
Step 3:
Select the Rec Mode.
Step 4:
Select the desired channel to record.
HDD CH8
65:56LP
CH 8
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAU S E
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS
PROGRAM
TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
I
HDD Rec 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
HDD MODE
Step 6: Stop Recording.
SKIP
REPLAY SKIP
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP
REV FWDPLAY
PAUSE
I
HDD Rec Stop 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
C
HDD MODE
This operation may take
a while to be recognized.
Easy HDD / DVD Recording (Contd)
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 33
Selecting the Recording Format Type
Selecting the recording format type
The recording format type you set here will be
memorized and applied to the disc whenever you format
DVD-RW discs.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select DVD Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select DVD Recording Format.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
4
Using / , select VR or Video.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
The default setting is Video.
Auto Format
Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, the
unit will automatically format the disc in the
recording format type you set in this section.
The following message will appear if a Timer
Recording is programmed to start in
15 minutes:
In the middle of programming timer.
Format disc?
If you select Yes , the formatting process will
continue. If you select
No, or do not replay in 1
minute, the formatting will not be performed.
Auto Format will not be performed under
the conditions listed below;
- During HDD Playback or recording.
DVD Recording FVD Recording Formatmat
VRVR
VideoVideo
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
34
Recording / Dubbing
Formatting a Disc
Note
The Recording Format Setting is effective only for
DVD-RW discs.You cannot change the recording
format for a DVD-R disc. DVD-R discs will always be
in Video mode.
You cannot mix two formats on one DVD-RW
disc.When you load a disc once recorded
before, the recording format cannot be
changed even if you change it in the Setup
Menu.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 34
35
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
6
Formatting is complete when the progress bar reach-
es to the right end.
The screen returns to normal after formatting is
completed.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
CompletedCompleted
Formatting a Disc (Contd)
Formatting a Pre-Recorded Disc
(Disc Format)
If you format a pre-recorded disc, all the data contained in it
will be erased and the disc will return to the blank media
status.
This feature is only available with the DVD-
RW disc.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select DVD Menu. Press ENTER.
3
Using / , select DVD Disc Format.
Press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
4
Using / , select Yes . Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / , select Ye s. Press ENTER.
Formatting will start.
The progress bar extends depending on the
progress status of formatting.
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
Are yAre you sure?
Yeses NoNo
Format disc?mat disc?
Yeses NoNo
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Note
When you reformat the disc, all contents of the disc
will be erased.
A disc once formatted with this unit cannot be used
on other DVD recorders unless finalized.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 35
36
Recording / Dubbing
Monitoring the Recording Quality
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
HDD DVD
With REC MONITOR, you can check how the actual
recording picture and the sound quality will be in the select-
ed Rec Mode before attempting to record.
If you are recording to the HDD, press
HDD first.
If you are recording to a disc, press
DVD first.
1
While in the stop mode, press REC MONITOR.
2
Press REC MODE repeatedly to change the Rec
Mode.
The Rec Mode will be changed as you press the
button as shown below. Refer to Rec Mode on
page 30.
You cannot change the Rec Mode during
recording.
3
Press REC MONITOR again to exit.
XP SP LP
EPSLPSEP
Indicates the remaining time of the disc
when recorded with the selected Rec Mode.
HDD CH8
XP 17:32 Rec Monitor
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 36
37
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Creating Chapter Marks Automatically
You can sort out the recording by inserting chapter marks
every set time interval.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
If Advanced Menu is displayed,proceed to step 3.
2
Using / , select Advanced Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
4
Using / , select Record.PressENTER.
Record Menu will appear.
5
Using / , select Auto Chapter. Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
6
Using / , select desired time option.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
The default setting is 10 minutes.
7
Press SETUP to exit.
DisplaDisplay
Auto Chapteruto Chapter
OffOff
5 min5 minutes
10 min10 minutesutes
15 min15 minutes
30 min30 minutes
60 min60 minutes
PlaPlayback
RecordRecord
Auto Chapteruto Chapter
Auto Finalizuto Finalize
RecordRecord
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Notes for Auto chapter
The actual setting time for chapter marks may differ
from the time you selected in Video mode.
Depending the recording time, a chapter with no
image may be created at the end.
Chapter marks will automatically be inserted at the set
interval with
Auto Chapter. (Chapter marks will
not be inserted while recording is paused.) For inserting
chapter marks at other spots, refer to Chapter Marker
on pages
104-107.
With Video mode DVDs discs, you cannot add /
delete chapter marks.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 37
38
Recording / Dubbing
Basic Recording
Note
Recording starts immediately after you press
REC / OTR (DVD) and continues until the disc is
full or you stop recording.
When the Clock Setting has not been made, the
space for a date and time of title names in the
Original List or Playlist will be blank.
When you record a TV program broadcasted
in both Stereo and SAP-audio on a DVD-RW/R
discs, you have to select the TV channel audio
(Stereo or SAP) beforehand. Only the selected
channel audio will be recorded. Refer to TV
Audio Setting on page
27 for more details.
Up to 300 titles can be recorded on the HDD.
Up to 99 titles can be recorded on the DVD-RW/R discs.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MODE
HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR
STOP PAUSE
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DISPLAY
REC MONITOR
Follow steps below to record TV programs.
Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-RW
discs for recording copy-once programs.(See page
31.)
If you are recording to the HDD, press HDD first.
If you are recording to a disc, press
DVD first.
Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a DVD.
1
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page
18.)
2
Using REC MODE,select a Rec Mode.
Refer to Rec Mode on page
30.
3
Make sure that the recording format is set to the
desired mode.
Refer to Selecting the Recording Format Type on
pages 34.
4
Using CHANNEL / , or the Number
Buttons
, select a desired channel to record.
5
Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) to start recording.
The information will be displayed for 5 seconds.
Press
PAUSE F to pause recording.
Press
REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) or PAUSE F to
resume recording.
6
Press STOP C to stop recording.
I
HDD Rec 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
HDD MODE
CH 8
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 38
39
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
6
Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) repeatedly to
change the recording time.
The recording time will be extended by 30 minutes
every time you press
REC / OTR (HDD / DVD).
The maximum recording time is 8 hours.
With HDD / DVD OTR, the recording time that
exceeds the remaining time of the recording
media will not be displayed.
To change the recording time during the
One Touch Recording, Press
REC / OTR (HDD /
DVD) repeatedly.
7
When OTR ends,the unit will turn off automatically
except under conditions listed below.
- If a Timer Recording is programmed to start in 5
minutes.
- During playback of HDD / DVD / VCR.
- During recording of HDD / DVD / VCR.
- While displaying menus or information on the
screen.
To cancel the OTR in progress, press STOP C.
0:30
(Normal Recording)
8:00 7:30
1:00
I
HDD Rec 0:06:50 CH8
HDD MODE
OTR (0:30)
65:56LP
One Touch Recording (OTR)
This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks of
30 minutes.
If you are recording to the HDD, press
HDD first.
If you are recording to a disc, press
DVD first.
Preparing for OTR:
Check that the recording media has enough recordable
space for the time you set.
If you are recording to a DVD, insert a recordable disc.
Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode
DVD-RW discs for recording copy-once programs.
(See page
31.)
1
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page
18.)
2
Using REC MODE,select a Rec Mode.
Refer to Rec Mode on page 30.
You can check the current Rec Mode by pressing
REC MONITOR.
3
If you are using a DVD-RW disc, make sure that the
recording format is set to the desired mode.
Refer to Formatting a Disc on pages 3435.
4
Using CHANNEL / or the Number
Buttons
, select a desired channel to record.
5
Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD).
Recording will start.
I
HDD Rec 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
HDD MODE
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Note
The remaining recording time will be displayed on the
Front Panel Display during a One Touch Recording.
Press
DISPLAY to see it on the TV screen.
You cannot pause a One Touch Recording.
The unit will turn off automatically under the
following conditions.
- When a power failure occurs.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 39
40
Recording / Dubbing
Timer Recording
You can program the unit to record up to 32 programs within a
month in advance. Daily or weekly recordings are available.
Preparing for Timer recording:
Be sure to set the clock before programming a Timer
Recording.Refer to Clock Setting on pages 24-26.
Check that the recording media (internal HDD or
DVD) has enough recordable space for the time you set.
Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a DVD.
Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-
RW discs for recording copy-once programs.
1
Press TIMER PROG.
Timer Program List will appear.
You can access this screen from the Setup Menu also.
2
Using / , select a line indicated New
Program
.PressENTER.
Timer Programming Window will appear.
8
CHEnd TimeStart Time
LPHDDFri 3 9 : :AM10FEB/
0:39HDD LP
10 AM10
Rec To
Mode
Date
71 2 3
4 5
6
Fri FEB/ 3 9:10AM HDD LP 52:38 i FEB/ 3 9:10AM HDD LP 52:38
Date StarDate Start Time End Time End Time CH Rec Time CH Rec To Modeo Mode
Ne New Progw Programam
TIMER PRTIMER PROGRAMMINGOGRAMMING
1/ 11/ 1
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
STOP
ENTER
TIMER
PROG.
RETURN
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 40
41
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Timer Recording (Contd)
1 Recording Date:
When pressing at the current date, the setting
will change as follows.
e.g.: January
1st
2 Start Time:
3 End Time:
4 Recording Channel:
To record from an external input, select
L1 or
L2. (Using camcorder, or other source.)
5 Recording Media (HDD or DVD):
To record onto the HDD, select
HDD.
To record onto a disc, select
DVD.
VCR is not compatible with Timer Recording.
6 Rec Mode:
Refer to Rec Mode on page 30.
7 Available recording time left on the HDD / DVD
under the programmed Rec Mode.
If there are more than one program, the recording
time of the programs other than the one being
edited currently will not be counted in the
calculation of the total remaining time on the disc.
3
Using / , select an item to set and using
/ , set the contents to suit your preference.
Pressing
RETURN will resets all the
information entered.
4
Press ENTER when all the information is entered.
will appear in the Front Panel Display indicating
one or more Timer Recordings are in standby.
To set another program, repeat steps 2 to 4.
When programs are overlapped, a warning message
will appear. For details on overlapped Timer
Programmings, refer to Hints for Timer Recording
on page 43.
Mon-Sun
Mon-Fri
JAN / 01
JAN / 31
Mon-Sat
Sat
Fri
Sun
5
To exit, press TIMER PROG.
If you turn the unit off, it automatically turns on and starts
recording 3 minutes before the Timer Recording begins,
and when the recording is completed, you will be asked
whether to turn off the unit.The unit will be turned off
automatically if you select
Ye sor if you do not reply
in
1 minute.
To stop recording in progress, press STOP C and hold it
for 2 seconds, or press
STOP C on the front panel.
Relay Recording
If the disc runs out of the space during Timer
Recording to a DVD, or if there is no recordable disc
in the unit, it automatically detects it and change the
recording media to the HDD. This feature is available
only for Timer Recording. Not available for OTR.
Note
If you have not set the clock yet:
The Clock Setting Window will appear at step
1 in
stead of Timer Program List. Continue with step 4 in
Auto Clock Setting on page 24 or Manual Clock
Setting on page 25 before setting a Timer Recording.
After step
5, you can use other devices as usual.
If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in
progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set for
HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will
automatically switch to the programmed channel
15
seconds before the programmed time, and the
recording in progress on the VCR will be cancelled
UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording
for HDD or DVD will start without cancelling the
recording currently in progress on the VCR. In this
case, the recording of the same channel will be made
on both VCR and the HDD or DVD.
If the starting time and the end time are the same, it
will be recognized as 24 hours recording.
If the starting time you entered is already in the past,
the recording will start as soon as you activate the
Timer Recording by pressing
ENTER at step 4.
If the Timer Recording you want to make starts at 11:00
P.M., for example, and ends at 1:00 A.M. next day, enter
the date of the starting time, then enter the starting
time as
11:00 P.M. and end time as 1:00 A.M.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 41
42
Recording / Dubbing
Timer Recording (Contd)
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
ENTER
TIMER
PROG.
PLAY
CLEAR
Editing the Timer Programming
Information
1
PressTIMER PROG.
Timer Program List will appear.
2
Using / , select the program you want to edit.
Press
ENTER.
Editing Menu will appear.
3
To change the setting of a program:
1. Using / , select Program Change, then
press
ENTER.
Timer Programming Window will appear.
2. Using / , move to the item you want to
change, then press
/ to change the setting.
To edit a title name:
1. Using / , select Edit Title Name, then
press
ENTER.
Editing Window will appear.
2. By following the steps in Guide to Edit Title
Name on page 95, edit the title name.
When you finish entering the title name,
press
PLAY B. Or using / // , select
Decide, then press ENTER.
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
JF
L
M
N
OK
Q
R
S
TP
V
W
X
YU
Z
2
3
4
51
"
#
$
%
!
,
-
.
/
+
@
[
]
^
?
7
8
9
0
6
'
(
)
*
&
;
<
=
>
:
{
|
}
~
_
v
w
x
y
u
z
q
r
s
t
p
l
m
n o
k
g
h
i
j
f
b
c
d
e
a
A
TIMER PROGRAMMINGTIMER PROGRAMMING
SpaceSpace
RightRight
LeftLeft
BSBS
ClearClear
DecideDecide
ReturnReturn
_
6
CHEnd TimeStart Time
LPHDDFri 3 9 : :AM30FEB/
0:39HDD LP
10 AM30
Rec To
Mode
Date
DeleteDelete
Edit Title NameEdit Title Name
Program ChangeProgram Change
Date Start Time End Time CH Rec To ModeDate Start Time End Time CH Rec To Mode
FriFri FEB/ 3 9:00AM 10:00AM 8 HDD LP FEB/ 3 9:00AM 10:00AM 8 HDD LP
FriFri FEB/ 3 9:30AM 10:30AM 6 HDD LP FEB/ 3 9:30AM 10:30AM 6 HDD LP
FriFri FEB/ 3 10:30AM 11:00AM 4 HDD LP FEB/ 3 10:30AM 11:00AM 4 HDD LP
1/ 11/ 1
TIMER PROGRAMMINGTIMER PROGRAMMING
Fri FEB/ 3 9:10AM HDD LP 52:38 Fri FEB/ 3 9:10AM HDD LP 52:38
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 42
43
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Timer Recording (Contd)
To delete a program from the list:
1. Using / , select Delete, then press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
You can access this screen by pressing
CLEAR
instead of ENTER at step 2.
2. Using / , select Ye s if you want to delete
the title.
4
PressTIMER PROG. to exit.
Delete this Delete this Timer ProgTimer Program?am?
Yes
No
Hints for Timer Recording
The priority of overlapped settings
When the timer programmings are overlapped, you will
receive a warning message.
If this happens,check the timer programming and change the
programming as necessary. Otherwise, the unit will prioritize
recording as described below.
Same start time and different end time:
The program set first has the priority.
Different start time and different end time:
A program with the earlier start time has the priority.
Recording time is entirely overlapped:
PROG. 2 will not be recorded.
End time of Program 1 is the same as the
start time of Program 2:
The amount of time cut off differs depending on the
recording media.
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
Actual
recording
The last 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
PROG. 2PROG. 1
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
Actual
recording
PROG. 1
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
Actual
recording
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
PROG. 3
PROG. 3
The first 15 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
Actual
recording
PROG. 2
The first 15 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
PROG. 1
Note
As to the timer program in progress (which is shown
in red in the Timer Program List), you only can edit
the end time.The changes made during recording will
be recognized as only specific to that recording in
progress and it will not affect the daily or the Weekly
Recording Setting.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 43
44
Recording / Dubbing
Recording & Playback Navigator
Guide to the Programmed
Recordings Screen
With the Recording & Playback Navigator, you can easily
program the Timer Recordings for the HDD by using the
calender displayed on the screen. Also the recorded titles
(programs) can be played back or edited just by selecting the
titles on the display.
The Recording & Playback Navigator is only available for
the HDD Original List.
When you press
PROGRAM RECORDINGS,the
Programmed Recordings Screen will be displayed on the
TV screen.
1 Preview window:
Playback the preview of recorded programs.
2 Information:
Shows the information on the selected program.
3 Previous recordings:
When the normal recording / Timer Recording has start-
ed, the cell turns blue and the channel number will be dis-
played. (e.g. [A])
4 Scheduled Recordings:
When a programming is completed,the cell turns pink and
the channel number will be displayed.(e.g. [B])
Programmed Recordings Screen shows a two-week calendar.
(One week prior to and one week after the current day.)
Programmed Recordings can be programmed in this
screen for programs broadcasted during next week.
If more than one week has passed since recording, the
recorded programs cannot be replayed or edited with
Programmed Recordings.
The screen describes each day as a day of the week, oth-
er than TODAY.
PROGRAMMED RECORDINGS
Previous Recordings
Scheduled Recordings
SAT SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
TODAY
SAT
ScheduledCompleted
4
5
6
7
8
9
AM
6:00AM - 7:00AM
CH 8ch XP
2
8
4
6
4
1
2
3
B
A
Programmed Recordings Screen
CH
CH
CH
CH
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MODE
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
ENTER
CLEAR
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
RETURN
TIMER
PROG.
Note
With the Recording & Playback Navigator, you can
program Timer Recordings up to one week ahead.
The recordings programmed for the days more than
one week ahead will not be displayed in the
Programmed Recordings Screen.
You can program more than
1 Timer Recordings in
one cell, but only the timer program that has the
earlier starting time will be displayed in the
Programmed Recordings Screen.
To see all the programs entered in a cell, press
REV
hh
or FWD
gg
.
If power is failed or unplugged from the outlet, some
information in the Programmed Recordings Screen
may be lost.
Only the titles in the HDD Original List can be
played back using the Recording & Playback
Navigator.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 44
45
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Recording & Playback Navigator (Contd)
Programming a Recording with
the
Recording & Playback
Navigator
Before programming,be sure to select the desired Rec
Mode. (See page 36 on how to select the Rec Mode.)
1
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS.
Switches to the HDD mode, and the Programmed
Recordings Screen will appear.
2
Using / / / , select the desired cell.
For example, to record from 4:00 pm two days
from the present day, choose the cell as follows.
There are two ways to program a recording.
1) Direct Program---Press CHANNEL / or
the Number Buttons to select a channel. Press
ENTER.The cell turns pink indicating that the
timer programming is now set in that cell.
Press
PROGRAM RECORDINGS to exit.
2) Detailed Program---Press ENTER
New Program
will appear.With New
Program
selected, press ENTER again.
Timer Programming Window will appear.
Enter the necessary information by following the
instructions described in Timer Recording on pages
40-43.
8
CHEnd TimeStart Time
LPHDDFri 3 9 : :AM00FEB/
0:39HDD LP
10 AM00
Rec To
Mode
Date
3
4
5
PM
ordings Scheduled Recordings
THU FRI SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
TODAY
SAT
Present day
Tomorrow
Day after tomorrow
Cell
HDDHDDHDD
To Change or Cancel the
Program
1
Repeat steps 1-2 above.
2
Press ENTER to call up the menu window.
3
To change the program
Using / , select Program Change, then
press
ENTER.
Timer Programming Window will appear.
Correct the information, then press
ENTER.
To cancel the program
Using / , select Timer Program, then
press
ENTER.
Timer Programming List will appear.
Press
CLEAR .
Confirmation window will appear. Select Ye s, and
press
ENTER.
To program a new Timer Recording
Using / , select New Program, then
press
ENTER.
4
Press TIMER PROG. to exit.
DisplaDisplay
ProgProgram Changeam Change
Timer ProgTimer Programam
NeNew Progw Programam
HDDHDDHDD
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 45
46
Recording / Dubbing
Recording & Playback Navigator (Contd)
Playback and Edit with
Programmed Recordings
1
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS.
The unit switches to the HDD mode, and the
Programmed Recordings Screen will appear.
2
Using / / / , select the recorded program.
The recorded program plays back in the preview
window.
3
Press ENTER to call up the menu window.
4
Using / , select Play From Start.
Press
ENTER.
The recorded program is played back.
If you want to resume playback from the last
viewed point:
Select Resume Playin step 3.
Refer to Resume Playback on page 72.
To edit a title:
Select Edit in step 3.
Refer to Guide to Edit Title Name on page 95.
To display a Title List:
Select Previous Recordings in step 3.
Refer to Playback from the Title List on page 68.
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
Resume PlaResume Play
EditEdit
PrePrevious Recordingsvious Recordings
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
ENTER
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 46
47
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Information on Dubbing
You can copy a HDD/DVD disc to a videotape or copy a
videotape to a HDD/DVD disc.This function will be possible
only if the DVD disc or the videotape is not copy protected.
Before starting this function, prepare for the recording on
the DVD-RW/R disc or the videotape. Refer to page 32
(HDD/DVD) or page
122 (VCR).
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
HDD
(Internal)
DVD-RW(VR)
Videotape
ToFrom
(O=Available X=Not Available)
DVD-RW(VR)
(CPRM-combatible)
DVD-RW
(Video)
DVD-R
Videotape
HDD (Internal)
Videotape
HDD (Internal)
DVD-RW(VR)
(CPRM-combatible)
DVD-RW(VR)
(Not CPRM-combatible)
DVD-R
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
*1,*2
*2
*2
*2
COPY (dubbing)
HDD
(internal)
program
The program remains
The program does not remain
DVD-RW
program
MOVE
HDD
(internal)
program
DVD-RW
program
Difference between (dubbing) Copy and Move
*1:The program (recorded) moves. (It will be deleted from
HDD.)
*2:You cannot dub the recorded program to HDD or DVD-
RW again.(Copy control signal will be recorded to the
videotape.)
Available Dubbing Direction for Copy-Once
Program
Note for dubbing
When you dub using DUBBING MENU, be aware
that all the programs in the Dubbing List will be
erased when you switch Original List and Playlist, if
you want to dub programs from the both lists ,
(Original List and Playlist), finish up the dubbing of
one list first and then make dubbing of the other list.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 47
48
Recording / Dubbing
One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
STOP PAUSE
With One Touch Dubbing, you can start dubbing right away
with just one touch.
Recordable DVD must be in the unit. (See pages 29-3
1.)
There should be enough space on the recording DVD.
Recording Format (VR or Video) and the Rec Mode
must be selected before recording.
Make sure to press the corresponding Device Select
Button before using the device of your choice.
Limitations:
You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs.
You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs.
If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing cannot
be started. Be noted that with HDD to DVD dubbing,
the duration of the dubbing is the duration of the
dubbing title (except for the High Speed Dubbing).
If a copy control signal is detected,the dubbing cannot
be started.
You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the titles
or the chapters of the disc is at its limit.
Dubbing cannot be executed during HDD or DVD
recording.
Dubbing cannot be executed while the Menu Screen is
showing (except for the Title List).
1
There are three ways to start One Touch Dubbing.
Method 1:Play the title you want to dub.When it comes to
the point where you want to start dubbing from,
press
STOP C
or PAUSE
F
. Then, press
DUBBING HDD DVD on the front panel.
The dubbing will start from there to the end.
If there is not enough space left on the disc, the
prohibited icon will appear and the dubbing will not
be started.
Method 2:Select the title you want to dub in the Original
List or Playlist.With the title selected (highlight-
ed), press
DUBBING HDD DVD on the
front panel.Or, with the title selected (highlight-
ed), press
ENTER to call up the Title List Menu.
And using / ,select
Dubbing.Then press
ENTER.
The dubbing will start from the beginning of the
title to the end of the title.
When the disc runs out of the space, dubbing
stops automatically.
Method 3:
If you press DUBBING HDD DVD on the
front panel in the stop mode without selecting
anything,the unit will start dubbing the last title
in the Original List or the Playlist. It will start
dubbing the title in the Original List if the
Original List was the last selected list.It will start
dubbing the title in the Playlist if the Playlist was
the last selected list.
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
DUBBING HDD DVD
STOP
C
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 48
49
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD (Contd)
If the title was in the resume stop mode, the
dubbing will start from the resume point to the end.
If the title was in the regular stop mode, the dubbing
will start from the beginning of the title to the end.
If there is not enough space left on the disc, the
prohibited icon will appear and the dubbing will not
be started.
2
The dubbing will stop automatically when it reaches
the end of the title. If you want to stop the dubbing
manually, follow the following instructions below.
To stop the dubbing in preparation mode:
Press DVD, then press STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press DVD, then press STOP C and hold it for
2 seconds. Or press
STOP C on the front panel.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Dubbing HDD DVDDubbing HDD DVD
XPXP
Dubbing HDD DVDDubbing HDD DVD
XPXP
C
Dubbing HDD DVDDubbing HDD DVD
XPXP
DubbingDubbing
TitleTitle
1 : 00 :56 (XP)1 : 00 :56 (XP)
Note for dubbing from HDD to DVD
You cannot switch the device mode except between
DVD and VCR during HDD to DVD dubbing.
High speed dubbing is not available for the One
Touch Dubbing.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 49
50
Recording / Dubbing
One Touch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DVD
STOP PAUSE
VCR
With One Touch Dubbing feature, you can start dubbing
right away with just one touch.
Recordable DVD must be in the unit. (See pages 29-3
1.)
There should be enough space on the recording DVD.
A videotape to be dubbed must be in the unit.
Recording Format (VR or Video) and the Rec Mode
must be selected before recording.
Make sure to press the corresponding Device Select
Button before using the device of your choice.
Limitations:
You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs.
You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs.
If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing,the
dubbing will be stopped.
Copy-once programs which are recorded directly from
the TV can be dubbed to the HDD/DVD.
Copy-once programs which are copied from the
HDD/DVD to a videotape cannot be dubbed further
from the videotape to the HDD/DVD.
If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing cannot
be started. Be noted that with VCR to DVD dubbing, the
unit recognize DVD's remaining time as the dubbing
duration although the actual dubbing will end when the
videotape ends.
You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the titles
or the chapters of the disc is at its limit.
Dubbing cannot be executed during recording of any
device.
Dubbing cannot be executed while the Menu Screen is
showing (except for the Title List).
1
Play the contents you want to dub.When it comes to
the point where you want to start dubbing from,press
STOP C
or PAUSE
F
.
2
Press DUBBING VCR DVD on the front panel.
The dubbing will start.
Dubbing VCR DVDDubbing VCR DVD
XPXP
I
Dubbing VCR DVDDubbing VCR DVD
XPXP
F
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
DUBBING VCR DVD
STOP
C
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 50
51
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
To stop the dubbing in preparation mode:
Press DVD, then press STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press DVD, then press STOP C and hold it for
2 seconds. Or press
STOP C on the front panel.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Dubbing VCR DVDDubbing VCR DVD
XPXP
Dubbing VCR DVDDubbing VCR DVD
XPXP
C
Note for Dubbing from VCR to DVD
When dubbing starts, the video image may be
distorted because of the Digital Tracking function.
This is not a malfunction. Play the videotape until the
image clears up and then, start the dubbing.
Playback audio is determined by the setting you make
in Setting the Playback audio section on page
127.
Dubbing takes as much time as the playback does.
You can not switch the device mode except between
HDD and DVD.
One Touch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD (Contd)
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 51
52
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape
You can copy the contents of the HDD / DVD to a video-
tape.
Limitations:
If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the
dubbing will be stopped.
If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a
confirmation message asking if you really want to
continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can
continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording
will start after the dubbing ends.
Be noted that with HDD / DVD to VCR dubbing, the
duration of the dubbing is the duration of the dubbing
title.
An error message will appear if you try to add a
program to the Dubbing List when the total playback
time of all the programs in the Dubbing List exceeds
10 hours and 30 minutes.
Limitation (DVD to VCR):
Only the contents of the VR mode DVDs or the Video
mode DVDs made on this unit can be dubbed. Any
other discs cannot be dubbed.
Preparing for dubbing:
Insert a recordable videotape with a record tab intact.
Make sure that the videotape has enough space to
record the contents.
Make sure the desired Rec Mode (SP/SLP) is selected
on the VCR in advance. (See page
122.)
(You can change the Rec Mode during dubbing also.)
Preparing for dubbing (DVD to VCR):
If you are dubbing from a disc, insert a disc to be
dubbed.
1
Press DUBBING MENU.
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will
appear.
2
Using / ,select HDD VCRfor HDD to
VCR dubbing. Press
ENTER.
Using
/ ,select DVD VCR for DVD to
VCR dubbing. Press
ENTER.
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
Example: HDD
VCR
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DUBBINGDUBBING
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
DubDubbing Directionbing Direction
XPXP
High High
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Rec ModeRec Mode
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
STOP
VCR
ENTER
RETURN
DUBBING MENU
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
STOP/EJECT CA
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:28 PM Page 52
53
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape (Contd)
3
Using / , select Select Program.
Press
ENTER.
Program List will appear.
4
Using / ,select a desired program.
Press
ENTER.
Program List Menu will appear.
5
Using / ,select Add to Dubbing List..
Press
ENTER.
The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
If you want to select programs from the Playlist,
select
Playlist and press ENTER to call up the
Playlist.Then follow the steps 4 to 5. (Be noted that
Original List programs and the Playlist programs can
not be entered together in one Dubbing List.)
If more than one program is already in the Dubbing
List, a green line will appear in the Dubbing List.
Using
/ move the line to the position you want
to insert the program, then press
ENTER.The
program is now inserted in the selected position.
6
Repeat the steps 4 to 5 until you select all
programs
to be dubbed.
7
After selecting all the programs you want, press
RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
Or press
ENTER to call up the option window and
select
Decide.
Then press ENTER to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
8
Using / , select Dubbing Start.
Press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
9
Using / ,select Ye s .PressENTER.
Dubbing will start.
It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing
preparation mode:
Press VCR first,then press STOP C.Or,press
STOP/EJECT CAon the front panel.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press VCR first,then press STOP C and hold it for 2 sec-
onds. Or, press
STOP/EJECT CAon the front panel.
HDD HDD VCR DubVCR Dubbingbing
SPSP
Yes NoNo
StarStart DubDubbing?
Dubbing List
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Select ProgSelect Programam
Direction HDD Direction HDD VCRVCR
DUBBINGDUBBING
2 2 Title 2Title 2
4 4 Title 4Title 4
Dubbing List
Program List (Oram List (Original)
1 1 Title 1Title 1
2 2 Title 2Title 2
3 3 Title 3Title 3
4 4 Title 4Title 4
5 5 Title 5Title 5
6 6 Title 6Title 6
7 7 Title 7Title 7
8 8 Title 8Title 8
2 2 Title 2Title 2
DUBBINGDUBBING
DecideDecide
PlaPlaylist
Add to DubAdd to Dubbing List.
Dubbing List
Program List (Oram List (Original)
1 1 Title 1Title 1
2 2 Title 2Title 2
3 3 Title 3Title 3
4 4 Title 4Title 4
5 5 Title 5Title 5
6 6 Title 6Title 6
7 7 Title 7Title 7
8 8 Title 8Title 8
DUBBINGDUBBING
Dubbing List
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Select ProgSelect Programam
Direction HDD Direction HDD VCRVCR
DUBBINGDUBBING
Note for Dubbing from HDD / DVD
to Videotape
You can not change the device mode between VCR
and HDD / DVD during the HDD / DVD to VCR
dubbing.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 53
54
Recording / Dubbing
You can copy the contents of the HDD to a DVD, or vice
versa.
Limitations:
If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing
cannot be started. Be noted that with HDD to DVD
dubbing (or vice versa), the duration of the dubbing is
the duration of the dubbing title (except for the High
Speed Dubbing).
Limitations (HDD to DVD):
You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs.
You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs.
If you try to dub copy-once programs, you will be
warned that the copy-once programs cannot be copied
but only be moved. If you still want to continue with
the dubbing (moving), select
Ye sand continue with
the steps. Moving of the copy-once programs is only
available with VR mode DVD-RW (CPRM compatible)
discs.
An error message will appear if you try to add a program
to the Dubbing List under the following conditions;
- When the number of programs in the Dubbing
List
exceeds 32 programs.
- When the total number of titles in the DVD will
exceed 99 titles.
- When the total number of chapters in the DVD will
exceed 999 chapters for VR mode DVDs.
Limitations (DVD to HDD):
If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the
dubbing will be stopped.
The contents of the Video mode DVDs recorded on
other unit cannot be dubbed using this unit.
An error message will appear if you try to add a program
to the Dubbing List under the following conditions;
- When the total number of titles will exceed 300
titles.
Preparing for dubbing (HDD to DVD):
Insert a recordable DVD. (See page 29.)
Make sure there is enough space on the DVD.
Recording Format (VR or Video) must be selected
before recording.
Preparing for dubbing (DVD to HDD):
Insert a disc to be dubbed.
Make sure there is enough space on the HDD.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DUBBING MENU
RETURN
ENTER
Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD
High Speed Dubbing
When dubbing from the HDD Original List to the VR
mode DVD-RW, High Speed Dubbing will be available.
High Speed Dubbing offers you the dubbing speed of
20 times the SEP mode dubbing.To perform the High
Speed Dubbing, select
High at step 3.
Just Dubbing
When dubbing from HDD to DVD if you select
Auto in the Rec Mode Menu, the unit will calculate
the duration of the dubbing material and the remain-
ing time in the disc and automatically select the most
suitable Rec Mode for the dubbing.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 54
55
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
5
Using / ,select a desired program.
Press
ENTER.
Program List Menu will appear.
6
Using / ,select Add to Dubbing List..
Press
ENTER.
The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
If you want to select programs from the Playlist,
select
Playlist and press ENTER to call up the
Playlist.Then follow the steps 5 and 6. (Be noted that
Original List programs and the Playlist programs can
not be entered together in one Dubbing List.)
If more than one program is already in the Dubbing
List, a green line will appear in the Dubbing List.
Using
/ move the line to the position you want
to insert the program, then press
ENTER.The
program is now inserted in the selected position.
7
Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until you select all programs
to be dubbed.
8
After selecting all the programs you want,press
RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
Or press
ENTER to call up the option window and
select
Decide.Then press ENTER to go back to
the Dubbing Top Menu.
DubDubbing List
2 2 Title 2Title 2
4 4 Title 4Title 4
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Select ProgSelect Programam
Direction HDD DDirection HDD DVDVD
Mode XPMode XP
DUBBINGDUBBING
DubDubbing List
Program List (Oram List (Original)
1 1 Title 1Title 1
2 2 Title 2Title 2
3 3 Title 3Title 3
4 4 Title 4Title 4
5 5 Title 5Title 5
6 6 Title 6Title 6
7 7 Title 7Title 7
8 8 Title 8Title 8
2 2 Title 2Title 2
DUBBINGDUBBING
DecideDecide
PlaPlaylist
Add to DubAdd to Dubbing List.bing List.
Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD (Contd)
1
Press DUBBING MENU.
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
2
Using / ,select HDD DVDfor HDD to
DVD dubbing. Press
ENTER.
Using
/ ,select DVD HDDfor DVD to
HDD dubbing. Press
ENTER.
Example: HDD
DVD
3
Using / ,select a desired Rec Mode.
Press
ENTER.
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
If you select Autofor the Rec Mode, the unit will
automatically calculate the remaining time and select
the most suitable Rec Mode (HDD to DVD dubbing
only).
High Speed Dubbing is available only when dubbing the
titles in the HDD Original List to the VR mode DVD.
4
Using / , select Select Program.
Press
ENTER.
Program List will appear.
Dubbing List
Program List (Oram List (Original)
1 1 Title 1Title 1
2 2 Title 2Title 2
3 3 Title 3Title 3
4 4 Title 4Title 4
5 5 Title 5Title 5
6 6 Title 6Title 6
7 7 Title 7Title 7
8 8 Title 8Title 8
DUBBINGDUBBING
Dubbing List
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Select ProgSelect Programam
Direction HDD DDirection HDD DVDVD
Mode XPMode XP
DUBBINGDUBBING
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Dubbing Direction
XPXP
High High
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Rec ModeRec Mode
DUBBINGDUBBING
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DUBBINGDUBBING
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Dubbing Direction
XPXP
High High
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Rec ModeRec Mode
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 55
56
Recording / Dubbing
Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD (Contd)
Note on the High Speed Dubbing
Duration of the High Speed Dubbing will depend on
the Rec Mode, the length, the disc type of the
material to be dubbed.
High speed Dubbing is available only when dubbing
the titles in the HDD Original List to the VR mode
DVD.
Note
When dubbing from HDD to DVD (or vice versa), even
if the selected Rec Mode is set to the higher quality
than that of the material to be dubbed, the program will
not be recorded in the higher quality. It only protects
the current picture quality.
You cannot switch the device mode between HDD
and DVD during the bi-directional dubbing between
HDD and DVD.
When you dub a copy-once program from HDD to
DVD, it will be MOVED to the disc (not copied) and
the original data will be erased from the HDD.
9
Using / , select Dubbing Start.
Press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
10
Using / ,select Yes .PressENTER.
Dubbing will start.
Preparing for the dubbing
It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
During High Speed Dubbing, the playback picture will
not appear.
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing preparation mode:
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example, if you are dubbing to DVD,press
DVD first),
then press
STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example, if you are dubbing to DVD,press
DVD first).
Then press
STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or, press
STOP C on the front panel.
Dubbing HDD Dubbing HDD DVDDVD
XPXP
Dubbing HDD DVDDubbing HDD DVD
XPXP
DubbingDubbing
TitleTitle
1 : 00 :56 (XP)1 : 00 :56 (XP)
Yes NoNo
StarStart DubDubbing?
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 56
57
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD (Contd)
Changing the Order of
the Dubbing List
1
If you are in the Dubbing Top Menu,select
Select Program, and press ENTER.
Program / Dubbing List will appear.
If you are already in the Program / Dubbing List
Screen,proceed to step 2.
2
Press to move to the Dubbing List.
3
Using / , select a program you want to move,
then press
ENTER.
Dubbing List Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Position Change.
Press
ENTER.
The selected program will be replaced by a single line.
5
Using / , move the line to the desired position,
then press
ENTER.
The program is now inserted in the selected position.
DecideDecide
Position Changeosition Change
Delete from DubDelete from Dubbing List.bing List.
Deleting a Program from
the Dubbing List
1
If you are in the Dubbing Top Menu,select
Select Program, and press ENTER.
Program / Dubbing List will appear.
If you are already in the Program / Dubbing List,
proceed to step 2.
2
Press to move to the Dubbing List.
3
Using / , select a program you want to delete,
then press
ENTER.
Dubbing List Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Delete from Dubbing List..
Press
ENTER.
The program is now deleted.
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top
Menu.
DecideDecide
Position Changeosition Change
Delete from DubDelete from Dubbing List.bing List.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 57
58
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
VCR
DUBBING MENU
PLAY
STOP
ENTER
DVD
You can copy the contents of a videotape to HDD or DVD
disc.
Limitation:
If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the
dubbing will be stopped.
Limitations (VCR to HDD):
If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a
confirmation message asking if you really want to
continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can
continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording
will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with
VCR to HDD dubbing, the unit recognize the HDD's
remaining time as the dubbing duration.The maximum
possible duration is
10 hours and 30 minutes.
Limitations (VCR to DVD):
You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs.
You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs.
Copy-once programs which are recorded directly from
the TV can be dubbed to the HDD and CPRM
compatible VR mode DVD-RW.
Copy-once programs which are copied from the
HDD/DVD to a videotape cannot be dubbed further
from the videotape to the HDD/DVD.
If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a
confirmation message asking if you really want to
continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can
continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording
will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with
VCR to DVD dubbing, the unit recognize DVD's
remaining time as the dubbing duration although the
actual dubbing will end when the videotape ends.
Preparing for dubbing :
Insert a videotape to be dubbed.
Preparing for dubbing (VCR to HDD):
Make sure there is enough space on the HDD.
Preparing for dubbing (VCR to DVD):
Insert a recordable DVD. (See page 29.)
Make sure there is enough space on the DVD.
Recording Format (VR or Video) must be selected
before recording.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 58
59
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD (Contd)
Press VCR first.
1
Press PLAY B to start playback of the videotape, and
press
STOP C when it reaches the point you want
to start dubbing.
2
Press DUBBING MENU.
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select VCR HDD for HDD
dubbing. Press
ENTER.
Using / , select
VCR DVD for DVD
dubbing. Press
ENTER.
Example:VCR
HDD
4
Using / ,select a desired Rec Mode.
Press
ENTER.
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
5
With
Dubbing Startselected,
press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
Yes NoNo
StarStart DubDubbing?
DubDubbing Starbing Start
Direction Direction VCR HDDVCR HDD
Mode XPMode XP
DUBBINGDUBBING
DubDubbing List
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Dubbing Direction
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Rec ModeRec Mode
DUBBINGDUBBING
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DUBBINGDUBBING
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Dubbing Direction
XPXP
High High
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Rec ModeRec Mode
6
Using / , select Ye s.PressENTER.
Dubbing will start.
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing
preparation mode:
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example, if you are dubbing to DVD,press
DVD first),
then press
STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example, if you are dubbing to DVD,press
DVD first).
Then press
STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or press
STOP C on the front panel.
Note
The device mode change is available only between
HDD and DVD during the videotape to the HDD /
DVD dubbing.
After starting dubbing, the picture may be distorted
because of the digital tracking function.This is not a
malfunction. Be advised to playback the videotape until
the picture is stabilized, then set the starting point at
which you wish to start recording, and start dubbing.
Playback audio is determined by the setting you make
in the Setting the Playback audio section on page
127.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 59
Recording / Dubbing
Front of this unit
Rear of this unit
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD/VCR
IN
OUT
HDD/DVD
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
L
R
To LINE 2 IN To LINE 1 IN
External Device
(VCR camcorder etc.)
S-Video
cable
VIDEO
S- VIDEO
AUDIO
RL
VIDEO
S- VIDEO
AUDIO
RL
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
Audio
cable
Video
cable
S-Video
cable
Audio
cable
Video
cable
or
or
S-VIDEO
IN
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD/VCR
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO VIDEO LRAUDIO
Settings for the External Devices
Connect the external source properly to the unit by using input jacks either LINE2 (Front) or LINE1 (Rear).
When connecting an external equipment of monaural output to this unit,use AUDIO L jack of LINE
1 (Rear) or LINE2
(Front).Use commercially available S-Video or Video cable and an Audio cable for this type of connection.
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
If Advanced Menu is displayed, proceed to step 3.
Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
2
Using / , select Advanced Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
4
Using / , select Display. Press ENTER.
Display Menu will appear.
DisplaDisplay
Screen SaScreen Saver
Select Select VideoVideo
FL DimmerFL Dimmer
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
5
Using / , select Select Video.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
6
Using / ,select the external input ;L1 (Rear) or
L2 (Front).
If you are using the jacks on the rear, select
L1.
If you are using the jacks on the front,select
L2.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
7
Using / , select the video input type you use,
Video or S-Video, then press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
The default setting is
Video In.
8
Press SETUP to exit.
Video InVideo In
L1 (Rear)L1 (Rear)
S-Video InS-Video In
Select Select VideoVideo
L1 (Rear)L1 (Rear)
L2 (Front)
or
60
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 60
61
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Dubbing from the External Devices
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
SPACE
0
INPUT
SELECT
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
PLAY
STOP
Before recording from an external device, connect the external
device correctly by following the direction on page 60,and turn
the power of the unit and the external device on.
1
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page
18.)
2
Select the recording media.
Recording to HDD: Press HDD first.
Recording to DVD: Press DVD first and insert a
disc. (It may take a while to load the disc.)
Recording to a videotape: Press VCR and insert
a videotape.
3
Select the appropriate external input channel of this
unit by pressing
INPUT SELECT. You also can use
CHANNEL / .
If you are using the jacks on the front set the
channel to L2.
If you are using the jacks on the rear set the
channel to L
1.
4
Select a Rec Mode by pressing REC MODE.
Refer to Rec Mode on page 30 for HDD/DVD or
page
122 for VCR.
5
Press REC/OTR (of the recording device,) on the
unit to start recording.
6
Press PLAY button on the external device to
record from.
7
For HDD or DVD:
Press
STOP C on the recording unit (this unit) first
to stop recording.
Then, stop the external device.
For VCR:
Press
STOP / EJECT CAon the recording unit
(this unit) first to stop recording.
Then, stop the external device.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Note
To avoid mistakes, it is recommended to use the
buttons on the front panel to operate.
Read also the instructions for the external device
thoroughly.
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
STOP / EJECT CA STOP C
POWER
REC/OTR (HDD/DVD)REC/OTR (VCR)
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 61
62
Recording / Dubbing
Protecting a Disc
Note
Disc Protect is available only with VR mode DVDs.
To prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the
titles, you can protect the whole disc.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu orAdvanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select DVD Menu.PressENTER.
3
Using / , selectDisc Protect. Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
If the disc has already been protected,
Disc
Undo Protect
will be listed in the menu instead
of
Disc Protect.To undo the disc protection,
select
Disc Undo Protectand press ENTER.
4
Using / select Yes . Then press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / , select YES.PressENTER.
The disc will be protected.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Yes NoNo
Are yAre you sure?
Yes NoNo
Protect this disc?Protect this disc?
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 62
63
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
Finalizing a Disc
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
Finalize
You must first finalize the disc before playing it back on
other unit.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu orAdvanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select DVD Menu, then press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Finalize,then press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
If the disc has already been finalized,
Undo
finalize
will be listed in the menu instead of
Finalize(DVD-RW only).To Undo the
finalization of the disc, select
Undo Finalize
and press ENTER.
4
Using / , select Yes ,then press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / , select Ye s , then press ENTER.
A progress bar will appear, and finalizing will start.
If you want to stop the process, press
ENTER.
Finalizing ends when the progress bar reaches the
right end.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
FinalizFinalize
CancelCancel
Yes NoNo
Are yAre you sure?
Yes NoNo
Finalize disc?e disc?
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
DVD-R
DVD-R
Note
If appears when pressing ENTER, that
means the finalizing process has reached the
critical point, and cannot be stopped.
You cannot cancel finalizing the DVD-R disc once it
has started.
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 63
64
Recording / Dubbing
Finalizing a Disc (Contd)
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
Auto Finalize
This feature allows you to set the unit to automatically
finalize the disc at the specified timing when dubbing to the
Video mode DVDs.This feature is available only with the
Video mode DVDs.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
Example: DVD-R (Advanced Menu)
2
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
If you are using the
Easy Setting Menu,skip
to step 4.
3
Using / , select Record.PressENTER.
Record Menu will appear.
4
Using / , select Auto Finalize.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Disc Full :The unit automatically finalizes the disc
when it becomes full during recording.
End of Timer Rec :The unit automatically
finalizes the disc when all the Timer Recordings to
a DVD are completed.
End of Dubbing :The unit automatically finalizes
the disc when a dubbing or One Touch Dubbing to
a DVD is completed and when there is no Timer
Recording in standby.
Disc FullDisc Full
End of Timer RecEnd of Timer Rec
Auto Finalize
End of DubbingEnd of Dubbing
PlaPlayback
RecordRecord
Auto Chapteruto Chapter
Auto Finalizuto Finalize
RecordRecord
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
AdvancedAdvanced Menu Menu
DVD-R
DVD-R
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 64
65
Recording / Dubbing
Before you
start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Others
Español
Initial Setups
5
Using / , select the desired timing to finalize the
disc.
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Example: Disc Full
6
Using / , select On. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
7
Press SETUP to exit.
OnOn
Disc FullDisc Full
OffOff
Note
Although finalization is recommended, you may be
able to play the VR mode discs on other unit without
finalizing.With regard to the Video mode discs, you
MUST finalize them before playing them back on
other unit.
After DVD-R discs are finalized:
- A DVD Menu is created automatically.
- Undoing the finalization is not possible.
- Additional recording or editing is not possible.
After Video mode DVD-RW discs are finalized:
- A DVD Menu is created automatically.
- Undoing the finalization is possible.
- Additional recording or editing is possible if you
undo finalize.
After VR mode DVD-RW discs are finalized:
- A DVD Menu is not created.
- Undoing the finalization is possible.
- Additional recording or editing is possible even
without undoing the finalization.
When DVD Menu is created Title List will no longer
be available.
Finalizing a disc (Contd)
4380_029-065.qx3 05.11.16 2:29 PM Page 65
66
Playback
Playback Information
Before you play back DVD discs, read the following informa-
tion.
Playable discs
This unit is compatible with the following discs.
To play back a DVD, make sure that it meets the require-
ments for region codes and color systems described in this
section. Discs with the following logos can be played back
on the unit. Playback of other disc types is not guaranteed.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
LogoDisc
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RW
(VIDEO/VR mode)
DVD-R
(VIDEO mode)
CD-DA
(AUDIO CD)
CD-R
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
CD-RW
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
Color systems
DVDs are recorded in different color systems throughout
the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which
is used primarily in the United States and Canada).
This unit uses NTSC, you must use DVDs recorded in the
NTSC system. You cannot play back DVDs recorded in oth-
er color systems.
Region codes
This unit has been designed to play back DVD discs with
Region One (
1). DVDs must be labeled for ALL regions or
for Region
1. You cannot play back DVDs labeled for other
regions. Look for the symbols below on your DVDs. If
these region symbols are not on your DVD, you cannot play
back the DVD on this unit.
The number inside the globe refers to region of the world.
A DVD labeled for a specific region can only be played back
on the unit with the same region code.
Playback of discs recorded in Video mode on a
regular DVD player (Video mode)
Discs recorded in Video mode can be played back on regular
DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible
with DVD-Video Playback*. You will need to finalize the
discs recorded in Video mode to play them back on other
DVD players.
*
DVD-Video format (Video mode) is a new format for
recording on DVD-RW/R discs that was approved by the
DVD Forum in 2000. Adoption of this format is optional for
manufacturers of DVD playback devices, and there are DVD-
Video players, DVD-ROM drives or other DVD playback
devices that do not play back DVD-RW/R discs recorded in
the DVD-Video format.
Play the recorded contents
You can select the title you want to play from the Title List.The Title List can easily be accessed by pressing TOP MENU.
The recorded titles can also be called up by pressing
PROGRAM RECORDINGS (HDD Original List only).
What are titles and chapters?
The contents on the HDD / DVD are generally divided into titles. Titles may be fur-
ther divided into chapters.
What are Original List and Playlist?
Throughout this manual, you will find Original List and Playlist to refer to the
Original content and the edited version. (See page 89.)
Original List refers to what’s originally recorded on the disc.
Playlist refers to the edited version of the Original List content.
Start Rec. Stop/Start Stop Rec.
Title 1 Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 1Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 2
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 66
67
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Basic Playback
Direct Playback
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page
18.)
If you are playing the HDD,skip to step 4.
2
Press OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray.
The disc tray will open.
3
Insert your disc with its label facing up. Align the Disc
to the disc tray guide.
Press
OPEN / CLOSE A again to close the disc
tray.
It may take a while to load the disc.
4
Press PLAY B to start playback.
Playback will start.
Depending on the media, the playback may start
from a resume point. (See page 72.)
If you are playing back a DVD-Video, a Disc Menu
may appear. Refer to page 70 for more details
about the Disc Menu.
5
Press STOP C to stop playback.
disc tray guide
CDCD
CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
Note
Some discs may start playback automatically.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 67
68
Playback
Basic Playback (Contd)
Playback from the Title List
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Follow steps 1-3 in Direct Playback on page 67.
2
PressTOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
To exit the Title List, press
TOP MENU.
3
Using / / / ,select a desired title, then press
PLAY B.
Playback will start.
Use / / / to move among the titles one by
one, and use
FWD D / REV E to jump to the
next / previous Title List page.
For HDD, playback will start from the resume
point. If you want to start it from the beginning,
use the Title List Menu.
4
Press STOP C to stop playback.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
REV FWD
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 68
69
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Basic Playback (Contd)
Playback from the Title List Menu
(Not available for the DVD-Videos, the finalized Video mode
DVDs, or the Video mode discs made on other unit)
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Follow steps 1-3 in Direct Playback on page 67.
2
PressTOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
To exit the Title List, press
TOP MENU.
3
Using / / / ,select a desired title, then press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
Example: HDD
Use / / / to move among the titles one by
one, and use
FWD D / REV E to jump to the
next / previous Title List Page.
4
Using / , select Play From Startif you want
to play the title from the beginning .
Select Resume Play(HDD only) if you want to
play the title from the point where it is stopped last
time.
Press
ENTER.
Playback will start.
5
Press STOP C to stop the playback.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Playback from the DVD Menu
With finalized Video mode DVDs or the Video mode
DVDs made on other units, a DVD Menu may be
contained instead of the Title List. DVD Menus are
created automatically when you finalize a Video
mode disc.With such discs,Title List is no longer
available.
Follow the steps below to play back a disc using the
DVD Menu.
Press DVD first.
1
Insert a disc.
DVD Menu may appear automatically. Otherwise
press
TOP MENU to call up the DVD Menu.
Press
STOP C if you want to exit from the menu.
2
Using / , select a desired title. Press PLAY B or
ENTER. Playback will start.
3
Press STOP C to stop playback.
DVD Menu
1 CH 10 XP
2 CH 10 XP
3 CH 8 LP
4 CH 8 LP
5 CH 8 EP
DVD-R
DVD-R
Note
Operation may vary depending on the discs.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 69
Playback from the Disc Menu
Some DVD discs contain disc menus that describe the
contents or allows you to customize the playback. For
example, the menu may offer choices for subtitle lan-
guages, special features, or chapter selection.
Some discs display them automatically when you
insert the disc. For others, follow the steps below.
Press DVD first.
1
Press MENU / LIST.
The
Disc Menu will appear.
If the feature is not available, may appear on the
TV screen.
2
Using / / / ,select an item. Press ENTER
to confirm.
Continue this step to setup all the features you
want or to start playing back the disc from the
menu.
MENU / LIST:
Displays a DVD disc menu. It may be the same with the Title
List.
Cursor / / / :
Moves the cursor on the screen.
ENTER:
Selects the currently highlighted menu option.
Number Buttons:
Selects a numbered menu option (some discs only). You may
have to press
ENTER after.
3
Press MENU / LIST to exit the Disc Menu.
DVD-V
DVD-V
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DVD
ENTER
MENU/LIST
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
70
Playback
Basic Playback (Contd)
Note
Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information
accompanying the disc for details.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 70
71
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Basic Playback (Contd)
Note
The audio source of MP3 / WMA files cannot be
recorded as digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.
Files that bear an extension other than .mp3 or .wma
(MP3 / WMA) will not appear in the MP3 / WMA
Menu.
Some unplayable folders or tracks may appear in the
MP3 / WMA Menu depending on their recording
status.
Playing back MP3 / WMA Discs
Press DVD first.
1
The MP3 / WMA Menu will appear automatically
when you insert a disc. Or in stop mode, press
TOP MENU to call up the MP3 / WMA List.
To exit the menu, press
TOP MENU again.
2
Press / to select a desired folder (group) or
track. Press
ENTER.
When a track is selected:
Playback will start.
When a folder is selected:
The files and the folders will appear.
Press / to select a track or a folder you want, then
press
ENTER.
Press
ENTER or FWD g to move to the lower lev-
el folders.
Press
REV E or RETURN to move back to the
upper level folders.
Hints for MP3 / WMA files:
Folders are known as Groups, files are known as Tracks.
Folders are accompanied by icon.
The system can recognize up to 999 groups (or folders)
per disc, and up to 999 tracks per disc.
The maximum displayable number of letters for the
group or the track name varies depending on their
names. Unrecognizable characters will be replaced with
asterisks (*).
If there are not any playable files in the folder,the folder
will not be displayed in the list.
This unit recommends the files recorded under the follow-
ing circumstances:
Sampling frequency:44.
1kHz or 48kHz.
Constant bit rate:
112kbps 320kbps.
FILE LIST FILE LIST
DISC NAME
FOLDER NAME 1
FOLDER NAME 2
FOLDER NAME 3
FOLDER NAME 4
FOLDER NAME 5
FOLDER NAME 6
1 FILE NAME 1
2 FILE NAME 2
1/2
WMA
WMA
WMA
MP3MP3
MP3
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DVD
RETURN
REV FWDPLAY
ENTER
TOP MENU
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 71
72
Playback
Special Playback
Resume Playback
You can resume playback from where you stopped last time.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press STOP C.
Pressing
STOP C twice will cancel the Resume
function.
2
Press PLAY B.
Within a few seconds, playback will resume from the
point at which it stopped last. Resume function
stays in effect even if you turn off the power.
For HDD:You can set a resume point per every title.
If you play back from the Title List Menu,you can choose
Play From Start or Resume Play. Otherwise
the playback will start from the resume point of the last
played title.
Press
STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press
PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning
of the last title in the Title List.
For DVDs:You can set only one resume point per
disc.
If a resume point is set, the playback will start from
the resume point next time you press
PLAY B.
Press
STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press
PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning
of the first title in the Title List.
For CD, or MP3/WMA:You can set only one
resume point per disc.
If a resume point is set, the playback will start from
the resume point next time you press
PLAY B if
you are playing a CD.As to the MP3/WMA files, the
resume playback will start from the beginning of the
track last played.
Press
STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press
PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning
of the disc.
WMA
WMA
WMA
MP3MP3
MP3
CD
CD
CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP
Note
Resume point will be lost when you;
-Open/Close the disc tray.
-Switch Original List and Playlist.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 72
73
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Special Playback (Contd)
Fast forward / Fast reverse
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press FWD D or REV E.
Every time you press
FWD D or REV E,
approximate speed will change as follows.
For HDD / DVD discs :
Sound will be output only during x1.5 fast forward if
you set
Fast Forward with Audioto On in
the Setup Menu, otherwise the sound will be muted.
For Audio CDs :
approximate speed is fixed at x8 with sound.
For MP3 files :
approximate speed is fixed at x16.
To return to the normal playback, press
PLAY B.
Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles
(for DVD discs) or tracks (for MP3) is not
possible.
Fast forward or fast reverse is not available for
WMA files.
OSD
indication
x40 x20
x1
Normal
speed
x1.5
x20 x40
speed
(HDD/DVD)
--
x8
Normal
speed
x8
--
speed
(CD)
--
x16
Normal
speed
x16
--
speed
(MP3)
+30+2+1-1-2-3
press button
: -1
: +1
MP3MP3
MP3
CD
CD
CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
REV FWDPLAY
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 73
74
Playback
Special Playback (Contd)
Slow forward / Slow reverse
Playback
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press PAUSE k.
2
Press FWD D or REV E.
Every time you press
FWD D or REV E,
approximate speed will change as follows.
The sound will remain muted.
To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B.
OSD
indication
x1/4 x1/8
x1/16
Normal
speed
x1/16
x1/8 x1/2
speed
(HDD/DVD)
+30+2+1-1-2-3
press button
: -1
: +1
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
REV FWDPLAY
PAUSE
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 74
75
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Special Playback (Contd)
Time Shift Playback
You can playback a title being recorded from the beginning
while recording continues.
Press HDD first.
1
Press PLAY B during recording.
Playback of the title you are recording will start
from the beginning.
Elapsed playback time will be displayed in the Front
Panel Display.
2
To stop the playback, press STOP C ONCE.
The Front Panel Display will switch back to show
the elapsed recording time.
IMPORTANT: If you press STOP C twice, it will
stop the recording.
Simultaneous Playback and
Recording
You can play back a title on one device while making a
recording on other device.
To do so,simply select the device you like to use for the
playback by pressing the device select button (HDD,DVD,
or VCR) during recording, and then follow the normal
procedure of playback.
Only in regard to the HDD,you can playback a title in the
same device (HDD).
To do so,press
TOP MENU during recording and select a
title you like to play,and then press
PLAY B.
To playback a title being recorded while continuing to
record, refer to Time Shift Playback on this page.
VCRVCR
VCR
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD
PLAY
STOP
DVD
TOP MENU
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 75
76
Playback
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
PAUSE
SKIP
VARIABLE
REPLAY
VARIABLE
SKIP
Special Playback (Contd)
Pause
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press PAUSE F.
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
2
Press PLAY B to resume play.
Step-by-Step Playback
1
During playback, press PAUSE F.
Playback will pause and the sound will be muted.
2
Press SKIP H or G repeatedly.
Every time you press
SKIP H or G, the playback
will go backward or forward one frame at a time.
Press and hold
SKIP H or G to advance or to
reverse continuously.
3
Press PLAY B to resume normal playback.
Variable Replay / Variable Skip
During playback, you can skip forward or backward by
the amount of time you set in the Setup Menu with
just one touch.
To set the time amount, refer to 6. Variable Replay /
Skip Speed on page 116.
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
Press VARIABLE SKIP if you want to skip forward.
Press
VARIABLE REPLAY if you want to skip
backward.
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
F
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
F
WMA
WMA
WMA
MP3
MP3
MP3
CD
CD
CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 76
77
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Note
When selecting a smaller factor than the current
one, the zoom box will not be displayed.
To cancel the zoom, select
x1.0using / , then
press
ENTER.
Zoom
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
Example: DVD-Video
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
There are four options (x
1.0, x1.2, x1.5 and x2.0),
which will be displayed excluding the current zoom
rate.
3
Using / , select a desired zoom factor to zoom.
Press
ENTER.
The zoom box will be displayed.
If you want to go back to the previous screen and
reselect the the zoom factor, press
RETURN .
4
Using / / / ,move the zoom box to the area
you want to zoom.Press
ENTER.
The selected area is zoomed.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00TC
× 1. 2
× 1. 5
× 2. 0
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
T C 1 / 1
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
DISPLAY
ENTER
Special Playback (Contd)
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 77
78
Playback
Special Playback (Contd)
Note
The A-B Repeat playback can only be set within the
current title (for DVDs), or current track (for Audio
CDs).
To cancel the repeat playback, select
Offat step 3.
The Repeat Setting will be also cleared when you
stop playback.
Group Repeat is not available during the Random
Playback.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
DISPLAY
ENTER
Repeat Playback
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
3
Using / , select a desired option for repeat play-
back. Press
ENTER.
The selected repeat playback will start.
Program: (HDD/DVD only) (Not available during Time
Shift Playback)
The current title will be played back repeatedly.
Chapter: (HDD/DVD only) (Not available during Time
Shift Playback)
The current chapter will be played back repeatedly.
Disc: (CD,MP3 / WMA,VR mode DVD-RW disc only)
The current disc will be played back repeatedly.
A-B: (HDD/DVD/CD only)
The part between the point A and B will be played
back repeatedly.
1.Using / , select A-B, then press ENTER.
2.Play back the title up to the point where you want
to set point
A.Then, press ENTER.
3.Play back the title up to the point where you want
to set point
B.Then, press ENTER.
The A-B Repeat Setting is now activated.
Track: (CD,MP3 / WMA only)
The current track will be played back repeatedly.
Group:(MP3 / WMA only)
The current group will be played back repeatedly.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00TC
Off
Program
Chapter
Disc
A - B
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
T C 1 / 1
WMA
WMA
WMA
MP3MP3
MP3
CD
CD
CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 78
79
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Special Playback (Contd)
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DVD
SETUP
ENTER
Random Playback
You can play back a disc randomly instead of playing back in
the original order.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select CD. Press ENTER.
Example: CD
3
Using / , select Random Play.
Press
ENTER.
Random Playback will start.
Random PlayRandom Play
Program PlayProgram Play
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
CDCD
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
DVD Recording FormatDVD Recording Format
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
CDCD
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
WMA
WMA
WMA
MP3MP3
MP3
CD
CD
CD
Note
To cancel Random Playback, press STOP C twice
during Random Playback.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 79
80
Playback
Special Playback (Contd)
Program Playback
You can program a playback sequence in your desired order.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menu or Advanced Menu will appear.
2
Using / , select CD. Press ENTER.
3
Using / select Program Play.
Press
ENTER.
Program Play Screen will appear.
4
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a
desired track. Press
ENTER or .
A cursor will move to the next.
5
Press PLAY B to start Program Playback.
Program Playback will start.
When you enter a single digit number using
the Number Buttons, press the number directly
without pressing 0 first.
PROGRAM PLAYPROGRAM PLAY
1 2345678910
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1 23456789101 2345678910
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3021 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4031 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 5041 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
0:06:11Total
0 9
PROGRAM PLAYPROGRAM PLAY
1 2345678910
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1 23456789101 2345678910
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3021 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4031 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 5041 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
0:00:00Total
Random PlayRandom Play
Program PlayProgram Play
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
CDCD
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
DVD Recording FormatDVD Recording Format
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
CDCD
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
CDCD
CD
Note
To erase tracks you entered, select the track and
then press
CLEAR.
You can make up to 50 program settings.
To cancel Program Playback, press
STOP C twice
during Program Playback.
The program will remain memorized unless you open
/ close the disc tray or turn off the power.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DVD
SETUP
ENTER
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
PLAY
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 80
81
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Note
In Search Mode Display, total numbers of each search
contents (title / chapter / time) are shown as a
denominator.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
T C 1 / 1
Current title number /
Total number of titles
Current chapter number /
Total number of chapters
Elapsed time of the
current title /
Total time of the
current title
Title / Chapter Search
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
Using SKIP H / G
1
During playback, press SKIP G to skip to the next
title or chapter.
Press
SKIP H once to skip back to the beginning
of the current title or chapter. Press
SKIP H
twice to skip back to the previous title or chapter.
Using DISPLAY
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
The title number next to will be highlighted.
Title:
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a desired
title number to search. Then,press
ENTER.
Title Search will start.
Chapter:
Using , move to for chapter.
Using / or
the Number Buttons, enter a desired
chapter number to search. Then, press
ENTER.
Chapter Search will start.
.
C
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
T C 1 / 1
T
?
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DISPLAY
ENTER
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SKIP
HDD DVD
Search
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 81
82
Playback
Search (Contd)
Track Search
Press DVD first.
Using SKIP H / G
1
During playback, press SKIP i to skip to the
next track.
Press
SKIP j once to skip back to the beginning
of the current track.
Press
SKIP j twice to skip back to the previous
track.
Using DISPLAY
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
The track number next to will be highlighted.
Example: CD
3
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a
desired track number to search.Press
ENTER.
Track Search will start.
DVD MODE
?
1 / 13 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
T
T
?
WMA
WMA
WMA
MP3MP3
MP3
CD
CD
CD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DISPLAY
ENTER
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SKIP
DVD
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 82
83
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Search (Contd)
Time Search
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
The number next to will be highlighted.
Example: DVD
3
Move the cursor to the elapsed time counter using .
When Time Search is not available,
--:--:-- / --:--:--
(0:00:00 / 0:00:00for CD) is displayed instead
of time count.
4
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a
desired time to search. Press
ENTER.
Time Search will start.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
TC
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
TC
T
?
CDCD
CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
DISPLAY
ENTER
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
Note
Time Search is available only within the same track
or title.
Elapsed time counter
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 83
84
Playback
Search (Contd)
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
Series Search
You can search for the group of titles made with the same
Periodical Timer Recordings.We refer to such a group of titles
as series.This feature is available only with the HDD.
Press
HDD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / , select any title that belongs to the
series you want to search and press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Search. Press ENTER.
Series List will appear.
Highlight will be on the series that contains the
selected title.
No SerNo Seriesies
002 Mon-Sun 10:00AM CH 8002 Mon-Sun 10:00AM CH 8
001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8
Select SerSelect Series
1/11/1
SearchSearch
DubDubbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
Play From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 84
85
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Search (Contd)
4
Using / , select the desired series. Press
ENTER.
Title List of the selected series will appear.
5
Using / / / , select a desired title to play,
then press
PLAY B. Or press ENTER to call up the
Title List Menu and select your desired playback style.
To show the regular Title List, select
Display All
Program
from the Title List Menu.Then press
ENTER.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
6
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
12
16
8
20
9
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
JUL/25/05
10:00AM
AUG/01/05
10:00AM
AUG/08/05
10:00AM
AUG/15/05
10:00AM
AUG/22/05
10:00AM
No Series
002 Mon-Sun 10:00AM CH 8
001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8
Select Series
1/1
1
2
3
4
1 Series List
Up to 8 series can be displayed on
1 page.
The series that contains the oldest title comes first on
the list.
2 Information on the series.
Type of the Periodical Recording (ex.every Monday),
start time, and the recording channel. (In the example
here, the information tells you this series is recorded
on every Monday, starting at
10:00 AM on channel 8.)
3 No Series
All recordings which are not periodical fall into this
category.
No Series will always be at the last on the list.
4 Current page / Total number of pages.
Up to
38 pages (300 series) are available.
Note
The unit exits the Series Search mode when you
switch the list type or the device mode.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 85
86
Playback
Selecting a Format of Audio and Video
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DVD
DISPLAY
ENTER
Switching Subtitles
Many DVD-Video discs have subtitles in one or more lan-
guages. Available languages are usually written on their
packages.You can switch subtitle languages anytime during
playback. Available language vary among discs.
Press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
Subtitle Menu will appear.
If you are playing a VR mode DVD-RW disc,
Off
or Onwill be the only option.
3
Using / , select a desired subtitle language.
Press
ENTER.
Subtitles will be displayed in the selected language.
When selecting
Off, subtitles will disappear.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00TC
Off
1.English
2.Japanese
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
TC
DVD-V
DVD-V
Note
Some discs will only allow you to change subtitles
from the Disc Menu. Press
MENU / LIST to display
the Disc Menu.
If a 4-digit language code appears in the Subtitle
Menu at step 2, refer to Language Code on page
135.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 86
Switching Audio Soundtrack
When playing back a title recorded with two or more soundtracks
(these are often in different languages), you can switch between
them during playback.
When playing back Audio CDs or MP3 / WMA files, you can switch
among stereo, the left channel only and the right channel only.
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press AUDIO to call up the available
audio settings on the TV screen (see examples below).
Example: DVD-Video
Example: CD/ MP3/WMA
2
Using / , select the desired setting, then press
ENTER to activate the setting.
As in the example below, if the title contains both main
and sub audio, you can further select
L (main),
R (sub), or L/R ( mixed of main and sub).
Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
Press
ENTER.
Using / , select the desired setting, then press
ENTER to activate the setting.
3
Press AUDIO to exit.
DISPLAY button can also lead you to the AUDIO
Menu. Simply press
DISPLAY twice during playback
to show the icons for the available features, then using
/ , select and press ENTER.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00TC
L / R
L
R
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00TC
1.Dolby Digital DUAL L
DVD MODE
?
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00T
L / R
L
R
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00TC
1.Dolby Digital 2ch English
2.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English
3.Dolby Digital 2ch English
DVD-V
DVD-V
HDDHDDHDD
Playback
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Selecting a Format of Audio and Video (Contd)
Note
Some discs will only allow you to change the
soundtrack from the Disc Menu. Press
TOP MENU
to display the Disc Menu.
Although this unit cannot record both Stereo (main)
and SAP(sub) at the same time, some VR mode DVD-
RW discs may contain both audio.With such discs,
you can select either Main (L), Sub(R) or both (L+R)
as your playback audio.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
DISPLAY
ENTER
AUDIO
87
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 87
88
Playback
Visual Noise Reduction
This feature allows you to reduce visual noise during playback.
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
.
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Off: When playing back titles with a few
noises such as DVD-Video discs.
Type 1: For the titles recorded in long time
mode such as SLP or SEP mode.
Type 2: Same as type 1, only more effective.
3
Using / , select a desired option. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
DVD MODE 1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
NR
TC
?
Off
Type1
Type2
NR
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
TC
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Selecting a Format of Audio and Video (Contd)
Switching Camera Angles
Some DVD-Videos contain the scenes shot from multiple
angles. In those scenes you can change the camera angles by
following the steps below. Changing angles is available only
where scenes are shot from different angles.
Press
DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice.
Icons for the available features will appear.
If you set the Angle Icon Setting to
On in the
Setup Menu (see page
117), an angle icon will appear
at the bottom right corner of the TV screen in
scenes where different camera angles are available.
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER.
Angle will change each time you press
ENTER.
DVD MODE
?
NR
1 / 1 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SEARCH
TC
DVD-V
DVD-V
Note
will appear when Angle feature is not available.
4380_066-088.qx3 05.11.16 2:34 PM Page 88
89
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Available Menus (o = Available, x = Not Available)
Media
Item HDD
Video Mode DVDs VR mode DVDs
Page Description
Original Playlist Original Original Playlist
Play from Start o o o o o 69
To play from the beginning of the title.
Resume Play o o x x x 72
To
resume playback from the point where it is stopped last time.
Protect/Undo Protect
ox x ox93
To protect/undo protect the title.
Delete o o o o o
90-91
To delete a title.
Edit o o o o o
-
Dubbing o o x x x 48
To make copies.
Search o o x x x
84-85
To search for the group of titles made with the same
Periodical Timer Recordings.
Protect/Undo Protect
ox x ox93
To protect/undo protect the title.
Delete o o o o o
90-91
To delete a title.
Edit Title Name o o o o o
94-95
Scene Delete o o x o o
96-97
To delete a part of the title.
Divide x o x x o
98-99
To divide a title into two titles.
Combine x o x x o
100-101
To combine two titles into one.
Move x o x x o
102-103
To rearrange the order of the Title List.
Chapter Marker o o x o o
104-107
To add/delete the chapter marks.
Add To Playlist o o x o o
108-109
To add a title to the Playlist.
Information on Disc Editing
1 Selected device (HDD or DVD) and selected list type
(Original List or Playlist)
2 The number of the current Title List page / the total number of the Title
List pages
Use
FWD D to jump to the next page. Use REV E to jump to
the previous page. Use / to move among titles one by one.
3 Title name, recorded channel and Rec Mode (if the title name has not
been assigned yet,the date and the time the recording was made,the
recorded channel (Original List Titles in the HDD or VR mode DVD-
RW only), and the Rec Mode (Original List only) will be assigned as the
title name automatically)
4 Thumbnails of the titles
Only the highlighted thumbnail can be seen in motion.
5 Date and time the title was recorded.
6 Protected icon
This icon appears only when the title is protected (Original List only).
7 Status bar
8 Preview window
9 Progress bar
10 Command bar
SCENE DELETINGSCENE DELETING
Start PointStart Point
ReturnReturn
0:00:000:00:00
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XP CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
5
7
8
3
6
4
9
10
2
1
Guide to the Title List
When you record programs to the HDD / DVD, a title list will be created.Title list is the thumbnails of the recorded programs
(titles).You can call up the Title List by pressing
TOP MENU and select the title of your choice from the list and can play or edit it
from the Title List Menu.
Title List Menu
Edit Menu
What are Original List and Playlist?
There are 2 types for the title list:Original List and Playlist.
Original List:
Original List is the list of the recorded programs (titles) which are created automatically when they are recorded.Original List is avail-
able for HDD, DVD-RW,and DVD-R. Please note that editing the titles in the Original List is like editing the original data. For example,
if you erase a title in the Original List,the title cannot be recovered. So,please be careful when you work in the Original List.
Playlist:
Playlist is the copy of the Original List.You can edit the titles in the Playlist as you like without affecting the Original data in the
Original List.It works like a back up for the Playlist. Deleting a title from the Playlist does not delete the corresponding title in the
Original List,but deleting a title from the Original List also deletes the corresponding title in the Playlist.With HDD and VR mode
DVD-RW,the Playlist is created automatically.Playlist is available only for the HDD and the VR mode DVDs.
There is no Playlist
for the Video mode DVDs
.
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:02 PM Page 89
90
Editing
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
Deleting Selected Titles
[VIDEO] [VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.
Be advised that the titles once deleted cannot be recovered.
With DVD-R discs, deleting titles will not affect the
recordable disc space.
With Video mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will
increase only when the last title in the Original List is
deleted.
With VR mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will
increase when any title in the Original List is deleted.
Deleting a title in the Playlist will not delete the
corresponding title in the Original List.
If you are playing the HDD, press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to delete.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
DVD-R
DVD-R
Deleting Titles
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:02 PM Page 90
91
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Deleting Titles (Contd)
3
Using / , select Delete. Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
4
Using / , select Yes .Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / ,select Ye s . Press ENTER.
The selected title is now deleted.
6
Press TOP MENU to exit.
JUN/15 11:05AM CH12 XPJUN/15 11:05AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
JUN/20/05
11:30AM
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
Delete this progDelete this program?am?
Yeses NoNo
Yeses NoNo
Are yAre you sure?ou sure?
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
Delete this progDelete this program?am?
Yeses NoNo
Note
When a title is deleted from an Original List,
corresponding title on the Playlist(s) will be also
deleted.
Deleting a Playlist will not increase the recordable
disc space.
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 91
92
Editing
Deleting all Titles in HDD
[ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
Press HDD first.
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menuor Advanced Menuwill appear.
2
Using / , select HDD Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
With Erase All in HDDselected,press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
4
Using / , select desired option. Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / , select Yes .Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
6
Using / , select Yes .Press ENTER.
All titles in the selected list are erased.
Yeses NoNo
Are yAre you sureou sure?
Yeses NoNo
Delete all progDelete all programs?ams?
PlaPlaylist Allylist All
OrOriginal Alliginal All
ErErase All in HDDase All in HDD
DVD MDVD Menuenu
HDD MHDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Erase All in HDDErase All in HDD
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
ENTER
HDD
SETUP
Deleting Titles (Contd)
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 92
[VR] [ORIGINAL]
To prevent accidental editing or title erasing, you can protect
the contents in the Original List.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
PressTOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch to Original List
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to protect.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Protect.PressENTER.
The key icon will appear at the upper left corner of
the thumbnail.
If the title has already been protected
Undo Protectwill be listed in the Title List
Menu instead of
Protect.To cancel the
protection, select
Undo Protectand press
ENTER.The key icon will disappear.
4
PressTOP MENU to exit.
To protect the disc itself,refer to Protecting a Disc
on page 62.
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
93
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Protecting / Undo Protecting Titles
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 93
94
Editing
Editing Title Names
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
REV FWDPLAY
SKIP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
CLEAR
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
[VIDEO] [VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can name titles and change the names from this menu.
The names you put on the titles will be displayed on a Title List.
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
Scene DeleteScene Delete
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 94
95
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Editing Title Names (Contd)
4
Using / , select Edit Title Name, then press
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
5
To enter a title name, refer to Guide to Edit Title
Name below.
6
When you finish entering the title name,press
PLAY B . Or using / / / ,select Decide,
then press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
7
Press TOP MENU to exit.
PROGRAM EDITING
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
JF
L
M
N
OK
Q
R
S
TP
V
W
X
YU
Z
2
3
4
51
"
#
$
%
!
,
-
.
/
+
@
[
]
^
?
7
8 9
0
6
'
(
)
*
&
;
<
=
>
:
{
|
}
~
_
v
w
x
y
u
z
q
r
s
t
p
l
m
n o
k
g
h
i
j
f
b
c
d
e
a
A
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
Space
Right
Left
BS
Clear
DecideDecide
ReturnReturn
CH2 XP _
Guide to Edit Title Name
Method 1: By selecting the letters on the screen:
Using / /
/
, move to a desired letter or a command key, then press ENTER.
The selected letter will be entered in the field at the top of the screen.
Method 2: By entering the letters directly using the Number Buttons:
Following the list below, press the Number Buttons repeatedly until the desired letter
appears.
If you want to enter the same letters successively,for example if you want to enter
AA,
press
ENTER after you enter the first A ( ), then enter the other A by pressing
() one more time.
Press
FWD g for a space.
Press
SKIP H / G to move the cursor to the left or right.
Press
REW h for a back space.
Press
CLEAR to erase all letters entered.
You can enter up to 64 letters,for the titles in the HDD and the VR mode DVDs.
You can enter up to 30 letters,for the titles in the Video mode DVDs.
2
2
A B C
a
...
press
Note:
Unidentified letters in a
title name are shown
by
*
. If you delete
them, adjoining letters
may change to
*
or
other.
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
abc
def
ghi
jkl
mno
pqrs
tuv
wxyz
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
space , 0
. @ / : 1
Press
ABC
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 95
96
Editing
Deleting a Part of a Title
Note
If a certain scene is deleted from the title in the
Original List, the title in the Playlist that contains
the corresponding scene will be deleted also.
When you search for the start/end point, you can use
SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g,
VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP ,
PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP PAUSE
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can delete a specific part of a title.
Even if a part of a title is deleted from the Playlist, the title in
the Original List will remain as it was, and recordable disc
space will not increase.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
Scene DeleteScene Delete
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
HDDHDDHDD
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 96
97
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Deleting a Part of a Title (Contd)
4
Using / , select Scene Delete, then press
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
5
Press PLAY B to start playback.
Play the title up to the point where you want to set a
start point for the scene to be deleted.
If you want to quit the process, select
Return
with / .Then press ENTER.
6
When it reaches the desired start point, press
ENTER, or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then
ENTER.
A start point is marked,and the display shown below
will appear.
If you want to reset the start point, select
Start Point Cancelwith / , then press
ENTER.
If you want to quit the entire process, select
Return with / , then press ENTER.
7
Press PLAY B to start play back again.
Play the title up to the point where you want to set an
end point for the scene to be deleted.
SCENE DELETINGSCENE DELETING
HDD
ORG
Start Point CancelStart Point Cancel
End PointEnd Point
ReturnReturn
0:20:380:20:38
SCENE DELETINGSCENE DELETING
HDD
ORG
Start Point
Return
0:12:45
SCENE DELETING
Start PointStart Point
ReturnReturn
0:00:000:00:00
HDD
ORG
8
When it reaches the desired end point, press
ENTER, or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then
ENTER.
An end point is marked, and the display shown below
will appear.
If you want to reset the end point, select
End
Point Cancel
with / , then press ENTER.
If you want to quit the entire process, select
Return with / , then press ENTER.
9
With Updateselected,press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
10
Using / , select Yes ,then press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
11
Using / , select Yes ,then press ENTER.
The scene is now deleted.
12
If you want to delete other parts,repeat steps 5-11.
Otherwise, select RETURNand press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
Using
/ , select Ye s, then press ENTER to
finish the editing.
13
Press TOP MENU to exit.
SCENE DELETING
HDD
ORG
Start PointStart Point
ReturnReturn
0:00:000:00:00
SCENE DELETING
ReturnReturn UpdateUpdate
0:25:320:25:32
End Point CancelEnd Point Cancel
NoNo
Delete Selected Scene?Delete Selected Scene?
Yeses
Yeses NoNo
Are yAre you sure?ou sure?
HDD
ORG
SCENE DELETING
HDD
ORG
ReturnReturn UpdateUpdate
0:25:320:25:32
End Point CancelEnd Point Cancel
NoNo
Delete Selected Scene?Delete Selected Scene?
Yeses
SCENE DELETINGSCENE DELETING
HDD
ORG
End Point CancelEnd Point Cancel
ReturnReturn UpdateUpdate
0:25:320:25:32
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 97
98
Editing
Dividing a Title
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
MENU/LIST
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP PAUSE
ENTER
TOP MENU
MENU/LIST
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
You can divide a title into two new titles.
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Playlist
Press
MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
MoMove
CombineCombine
Scene DeleteScene Delete
DivideDivide
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 98
99
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Dividing a Title (Contd)
4
Using / , select Divide, then press ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
5
Press PLAY B to start playback. Play the title up to
the point where you want to divide the title.
6
When it reaches the desired dividing point, press
ENTER, or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
7
Using / , select Yes ,then press ENTER.
The title is now divided.
8
PressTOP MENU to exit.
PROGRAM DIVIDINGPROGRAM DIVIDING
Divide
0:45:10
Yeses NoNo
Divide progDivide program here?am here?
HDD
PL
PROGRAM DIVIDINGPROGRAM DIVIDING
Divide
0:00:00
HDD
PL
Note
If a disc contains the maximum number of
recordings (HDD:300, DVD-RW disc:99), you
cannot divide any titles.
With DVD-RW disc, you cannot divide the titles if
the total number of chapters has already reached
999.
When you search for the dividing point, you can use
SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g,
VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP ,
PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 99
100
Editing
Combining Titles
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
MENU/LIST
HDD DVD
ENTER
TOP MENUMENU/LIST
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
You can combine two titles into a single title.
Steps on how to combine title
1 and 2 are shown here as an
example.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Playlist
Press
MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title (title 1).
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit,then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
MoMove
CombineCombine
Scene DeleteScene Delete
DivideDivide
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
HDDHDDHDD
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 100
101
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Combining Titles (Contd)
4
Using / , select Combine, then press
ENTER.
The selected title will disappear temporarily, and the
frame of the next title will be highlighted.
5
Using / / / , select a title to combine
(title
2). Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
6
Using / , select Yes .PressENTER.
Two titles will be combined into a single title.
7
PressTOP MENU to exit.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
4
7
5
2
6
3
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUN/20/05
11:30AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
NoNo
Combine these progCombine these programs?ams?
Yeses
1
2
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
4
7
5
2
6
3
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUN/20/05
11:30AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
1
2
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
Note
If the number of chapter marks in the combined
title exceeds 999, the combination will be rejected.
If one of two titles in the Original List is deleted,
the combined new title will be deleted.
The name of the title selected first will become
the name of the combined title.
The title selected first will be the first half of the
combined title.
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 101
102
Editing
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
MENU/LIST
HDD DVD
ENTER
TOP MENUMENU/LIST
Moving Titles
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
You can move the title position.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Playlist
Press
MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to move.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
MoMove
CombineCombine
Scene DeleteScene Delete
DivideDivide
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
HDDHDDHDD
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 102
103
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Moving Titles (Contd)
4
Using / , select Move,then press ENTER.
The selected title will become a single line.
5
Using / / / , move the line to the desired
position, then press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
6
Using / , select YES. Press ENTER.
The title is now moved to the new position.
7
PressTOP MENU to exit.
4
7
5
2
6
3
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUN/20/05
11:30AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
1
2
NoNo
MoMove this proge this program elseam elsewhere?where?
Yeses
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
7
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUN/20/05
11:30AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
Note
When the total number of the titles exceeds 6,
press
FWD g to move to the first title of the
next page, and press
REV h to move to the last
title of the previous page.
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 103
104
Editing
Chapter Marker
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
Adding Chapter Marks
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can add or delete chapter marks on each title and can
use them for the Chapter Search.
You can add up to 999 chapter marks anywhere you want.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using /
/ /
, select a desired title to edit.
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
Scene DeleteScene Delete
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 104
105
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Chapter Marker (Contd)
4
Using / , select Chapter Mark, then press
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
If there are chapter marks already set for the title,
they are indicated on the progress bar.
5
Press PLAY B to start playback.
Play the title up to the point where you want to set a
chapter marks.
6
When it reaches the desired point, press ENTER,or
press
PAUSE F or STOP C and then ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
7
Using
/
, select Ye s ,then press ENTER. The
point will be marked with a single line.
8
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you set as many chapter
marks as you want.
9
When you finish setting all the marks you want, select
Update using
/
, then press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
If you want to quit the entire process, select
Cancelusing
/
, then press ENTER.
CHAPTER MARKINGCHAPTER MARKING
Add Update Cancel
0:00:25
Yeses NoNo
Update?Update?
HDD
ORG
CHAPTER MARKINGCHAPTER MARKING
Add Update Cancel
0:00:10
NoNo
Add chapters here?Add chapters here?
Yeses
HDD
ORG
CHAPTER MARKINGCHAPTER MARKING
AddAdd UpdateUpdate CancelCancel
0:00:00
HDD
ORG
10
Using
/
, select Ye s ,then press ENTER.
Chapter marks are now added.
11
Press TOP MENU to exit.
Note
When you search for the point to add a chapter mark,
you can use
SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g,
VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP ,
PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 105
106
Editing
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
Chapter Marker (Contd)
Deleting Chapter Marks
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
If you are playing the HDD,press HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit .
Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
Scene DeleteScene Delete
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 106
107
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Chapter Marker (Contd)
4
Using / , select Chapter Mark, then press
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
5
Press to move to the progress bar, and then select
a chapter mark you want to delete using
/
, then
press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
6
Using / , select Yes ,then press ENTER.
The chapter mark disappears.
7
Repeat steps 5 to 6 until you erase as many chapter
marks you want.
8
When you finish deleting all the unnecessary marks,
press to move back to the command bar.
Then using
/ , select Update. Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
9
Using
/
, selectYe s ,then press ENTER.
The chapters marks are now deleted from the title.
10
Press TOP MENU to exit.
CHAPTER MARKINGCHAPTER MARKING
Add Update Cancel
0:00:25
Yeses NoNo
Update?Update?
HDD
ORG
CHAPTER MARKINGCHAPTER MARKING
AddAdd UpdateUpdate Cancel
0:00:00
NoNo
Delete this chapter marDelete this chapter mark?k?
Yeses
HDD
ORG
CHAPTER MARKINGCHAPTER MARKING
Add UpdateUpdate CancelCancel
0:00:00
HDD
ORG
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 107
108
Editing
Adding Titles to a Playlist
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can add a title to the Playlist as you prefer.
You can add up to 99 titles for DVDs and 300 titles for
HDD.
If you are playing the HDD,press
HDD first.
If you are playing a disc, press
DVD first.
1
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: HDD Original List
Press
MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
2
Using /
/ /
, select a desired title to add to
the Playlist. Press
ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
3
Using / , select Edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
Scene DeleteScene Delete
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XPJUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
SearchSearch
DubDubbingbing
EditEdit
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Resume PlaResume Play
PlaPlay Fy From Starrom Start
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PREVIOUS RECORDINGSPREVIOUS RECORDINGS
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
HDDHDDHDD
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 108
109
Editing
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
4
Using / , select Add To Playlist, then press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
5
Using
/
, select Ye s ,then press ENTER.
The selected title is now added to the Playlist, and
the Playlist will be displayed automatically.
6
Press TOP MENU to exit.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPAPR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
PROGRAM EDITINGPROGRAM EDITING
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
APR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
Scene DeleteScene Delete
Edit Edit Title NameTitle Name
DeleteDelete
ProtectProtect
Add Add To Plao Playlistylist
Chapter MarChapter Mark
NoNo
MakMake plae playlist progylist program?am?
Yeses
Note
For VR mode DVD-RW disc, if the Playlist contains
more than 99 titles or 999 chapters,
Add To
Playlist
cannot be selected.
For the HDD, if the Playlist contains more than
300 titles,
Add to Playlist cannot be selected.
To delete titles from Playlist, refer to Deleting Titles
on pages 9
0-91.
Adding Titles to a Playlist (Contd)
4380_089-109.qx3 05.11.16 3:03 PM Page 109
110
Other Setups
Tour of the Setup Menus
The following table shows the items which you can change the setting and their default settings. Refer to the following table
for your convenience.
Set the language for OSD (on-screen display).
Set the parental level for DVD Disc Playback.
Set the language for Disc Menu.
Set the language for audio.
Set the language for subtitles.
Set whether the sound recorded in 96 kHz will
be down sampled in 48 kHz.
Set the type of sound signal output from the digi-
tal audio output jack.
Compressing the range of sound volume.
Set whether or not to output sound during fast
forward playback.
Set the amount of skip time when you press
VARIABLE SKIP .
Set the amount of rewind time when you press
VARIABLE REPLAY .
Set whether or not to display the angle icon.
Set progressive scan on/off.
Setup Menu Items
Selection (highlight is the default)
Contents
OSD Language Page 21 English
Français
Español
Clock Setting Clock Setting Page 25
Auto Clock Setting Off
Pages 24-25 Auto
Manual
Daylight Saving Time On
Page 26 Off
Channel Setting Auto Preset Pages 22-23
Manual Preset Page 23
TV Audio Select Stereo
Page 27 SAP
Playback TV Aspect 4 : 3 Letter Box
Pages 28 4 : 3 Pan & Scan
16 : 9 Wide
Parental Lock All
Page 113 level 8 to 1
Disc Menu Language English
Page
114 French
Spanish
Other
Audio Language Original
Page
114 English
French
Spanish
Other
Subtitle Language Off
Page
114 English
French
Spanish
Other
Audio Out PCM
Page 115 48kHz
96kHz
Dolby Digital
PCM
Stream
Dynamic Range Control
On
Off
Fast Forward with Audio
On
Off
Variable Replay/Skip Speed Variable Skip
Page
116 5 seconds
15seconds
30seconds
1 minute
5 minutes
Variable Replay
5 seconds
15seconds
30seconds
1 minute
5 minutes
Angle Icon On
Page 117 Off
Progressive On
Page 117 Off
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 110
111
Other Setups
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Tour of the Setup Menus (Cont’d)
Note
If you change the settings in the Setup Menus, the information of the contents remain memorized even after the
power is turned off or the disc tray is opened or closed.
Set the video input type for the external input.
Set the brightness of the Front Panel Display.
Set the idling time before the screen saver starts.
Setup Menu Items
Selection (highlight is the default)
Contents
Record Auto Finalize Disc Full
Pages
64-65 On
Off
End of Timer Rec
On
Off
End of Dubbing
On
Off
Auto Chapter Off
Page
37 5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Display Select Video L
1 (Rear)
Page 60 Video In
S-Video In
L2 (Front)
Video In
S-Video In
FL Dimmer Auto
Page
119 Bright
Dark
Screen Saver On
Page 119 Off
Reset to factory default Page
120
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 111
112
Other Setups
Playback Setting
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
VARIABLE
REPLAY
VARIABLE
SKIP
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menuor Advanced Menuwill appear.
If Advanced Menu is displayed, proceed to step 3.
2
Using / , select Advanced Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Initial Setup.
Press
ENTER.
4
Using / , select Playback.PressENTER.
Playback Menu will appear.
5
Using / , select a desired item to set.
Press
ENTER.
Menu or option window will appear.
6
Referring to 1 to 8 on pages 113-117, set the
selected item.
7
When you finish with the setting, press SETUP to exit.
Angle IconAngle Icon
Variable Replale Replay/Skip Speedy/Skip Speed
Audio Outudio Out
Subtitle LanguageSubtitle Language
Audio Languageudio Language
Disc MenDisc Menu Languageu Language
Parental Locarental Lock
TV AspectTV Aspect
PlaPlayback
ProgProgressive
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 112
113
Other Setups
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Playback Setting (Contd)
B:When a password has been set already.
Password input field will appear.
1 Using the Number Buttons, enter the 4-digit
password (The password will be displayed as
*
for
your security.)
Press
ENTER.
Parental Level List will appear.
2 Using / , select a desired level, then press ENTER.
Change Password?will appear.
If you want to change the password, select
Ye s and
press
ENTER.
The password input field will appear. Input the new
password, then press
ENTER.
The setting is now activated.
If you only want to change the setting and not want to
change the password, select
No, then press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Yes
NoNo
Change PChange Passassword?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AllAll
Parental Locarental Lock
Passwordord
_ _ _ _
RATING
EXPLANATION
• ALL-Parental Controls is inactive; all discs can play.
• 8 - Adult material
• 7 - NC - 17 - Not appropriate for children under 17
• 6 - R - Restricted; parental approval required for
viewers under 18
• 4 - PG13 - Unsuitable for children under 13
• 3 - PG - Parental Guidance suggested
• 1 - G - General Audience; recommended for all ages
1. Parental Lock (Default: All)
You can set the Parental Lock Level to keep your children
from viewing the inappropriate materials.
(Follow the steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using / , select Parental Lock.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
If you haven't set a password, proceed to A.
If you have already set a password, proceed to B.
A:When a password has not been set yet.
Parental Level List will appear.
1 Using / , select a desired level,then press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
2 Using
/
, select Ye s ,then press ENTER.
Password input field will appear.
3
Using the Number Buttons,enter the 4-digit password.
Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Password
_ _ _ _
Yes
NoNo
Change PChange Password?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AllAll
Parental Lock
Note
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level.
Playback will stop if the discs general rating exceeds the
level you set. It will require you to enter a password
before the disc will be played back. This function prevents
your children from viewing inappropriate materials.
Parental Lock may not be available on some discs.
Some DVDs may not completely support Parental
Lock. Be sure to check if the Parental Lock
operates in the way that you have set.
Record the password in case you forget it.
If you enter incorrect number, use to move back
to the number you want to correct and re-enter
the correct number.
When you forget the password or you want to clear all
settings in Parental Lock, enter
4, 7, 3, 7 using the
Number Buttons
in input window at step B. Password
will be cleared and Parental Lock Levels will be set to
All.
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 113
114
Other Setups
Playback Setting (Contd)
4. Subtitle Language (Default: Off)
You can set the subtitle language.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using / , select Subtitle Language.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / , select a desired language. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
When you finish entering the code,press
ENTER. Refer
to Language Code on page
135.
CodeCode
________
If Otheris selected,enter 4-digit code using
the Number buttons.
Off
Off
Subtitle Language
Subtitle Language
English
English
French
Spanish
Spanish
Other
Other
2. Disc Menu Language (Default: English)
You can set the language for Disc Menu.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using / , select Disc Menu Language.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / , select a desired language. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
3. Audio Language (Default: Original)
You can set the Audio Language.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using / , select Audio Language.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / , select a desired language. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
When
Original is selected, the audio language will
be the discs default language.
OrOriginal
Audio Language
EnglishEnglish
French
SpanishSpanish
OtherOther
EnglishEnglish
French
Disc MenDisc Menu Language
SpanishSpanish
OtherOther
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 114
115
Other Setups
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Playback Setting (Contd)
Dolby Digital (Default:Stream)
Using / , select a desired setting.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
PCM: Convert the Dolby Digital into PCM
(2 channel).
When your amplifier / decoder is NOT
compatible with Dolby Digital,set to PCM.
Stream: Outputs Dolby Digital signals.
When your amplifier / decoder is compati-
ble with Dolby Digital,set to
Stream.
Dolby DigitalDolby Digital
DTSDTS
PCMPCM
DolbDolby Digitaly Digital
StreamStream
5. Audio Out
You can set the digital audio output.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using / , select Audio Out.
Press
ENTER.
Menu window will appear.
Using / , select a desired item to set.
Press
ENTER.
Menu or Option window will appear.
Referring to the explanations below, set the selected item.
PCM (Default:48kHz)
Using / , select a desired setting.Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
48kHz :If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible
with 96kHz PCM, select
48kHz. 96kHz
sound will be output in 48kHz.
96kHz :If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with
96kHz PCM, select
96kHz. 96kHz sound
will be output.
Dolby DigitalDolby Digital
48kHz48kHz
PCMPCM
96kHz96kHz
PCMPCM
Dolby DigitalDolby Digital
Audio OutAudio Out
Dynamic Range ControlDynamic Range Control
Fast Forward with AudioFast Forward with Audio
Note
When playing back disc with copyright protection
Even if you select
96kHz,the sound will be down
sampled at 48kHz.
Note
When playing back a DVD-RW disc recorded
in VR mode
If the audio on a disc is recorded in Dolby Digital
format, set Dolby Digital to PCM so that you can
switch to main audio (L), sub audio (R), or a mix of
both (L / R) with your amplifier / decoder.
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 115
6. Variable Replay / Skip Speed
Assign the
VARIABLE REPLAY
/
VARIABLE
SKIP button an
amount of time to rewind or skip.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112. See page 76 also.)
Using / , select Variable Replay / Skip Speed .
Press
ENTER.
Menu window will appear.
Using / , select a desired item to set.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Referring to the explanations below, set the selected
item.
Variable Skip (Default:30 seconds)
Sets the amount of skip time for
VARIABLE
SKIP .
Variable Replay (Default: 30 seconds)
Sets the amount of rewind time for
VARIABLE REPLAY
.
Variable Replale Replay
5 seconds5 seconds
15 seconds15 seconds
30 seconds30 seconds
1 min1 minute
5 min5 minutes
DisplaDisplay
Varariable Skiple Skip
5 seconds5 seconds
15 seconds15 seconds
30 seconds30 seconds
1 min1 minute
5 min5 minutes
Variable Replale Replay
Variable Skiple Skip
Variable Replale Replay/Skip Speedy/Skip Speed
116
Other Setups
Dynamic Range Control (Default: On)
You can set to
On to compress the range between
soft and loud sounds.
Using / , select a desired setting.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Fast Forward with Audio (Default: On)
You can set to Onto output the sound during play-
back in x1.5 fast forward.
Using
/ , select a desired setting.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Dolby DigitalDolby Digital
DTSDTS
OnOn
Fast Forward with Aard with Audio
OffOff
DTSDTS
OnOn
Dynamic Dynamic Range Range ControlControl
OffOff
Playback Setting (Contd)
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 116
117
Other Setups
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Playback Setting (Contd)
7. Angle Icon (Default: Off)
You can set to
On to show the Angle icon on the
screen whenever the feature is available.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112. See page 88 also.)
Using / , select Angle Icon.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / , select a desired setting.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
8. Progressive (Default: Off)
You can set to
On to activate progressive scan.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using / , select Progressive.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / , select a desired setting.
Press
ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
ProgProgressive
OffOff
OnOn
Angle IconAngle Icon
OffOff
OnOn
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 117
118
Other Setups
Display Setting
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menuor Advanced Menuwill appear.
If Advanced Menu is displayed, proceed to step 3.
2
Using / , select Advanced Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Initial Setup.PressENTER.
4
Using / , select Display.PressENTER.
Display Menu will appear.
5
Using / , select a desired item to set.
Press
ENTER.
Menu or option window will appear.
6
Referring to 1 and 2 on page 119, set the selected
item.
7
When you finish with the setting,press SETUP to exit.
DisplaDisplay
Screen SaScreen Saver
Select VideoVideo
FL DimmerFL Dimmer
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 118
119
Other Setups
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
1. FL Dimmer (Default:Auto)
You can s
et the brightness of the Front Panel Display.
You can select a setting from
Auto, Bright,or
Dark.When Autois selected, the display turns
brighter when the power is on and darker when the power
is off.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 118.)
Using / , select FL Dimmer.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / select a desired setting. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
2. Screen Saver (Default:On)
You can set to
On to activate the Screen Saver after 10
minutes of no activity.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 118.)
Using / , select Screen Saver.
Press
ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
OnOn
OffOff
Screen SaScreen Saver
FL DimmerFL Dimmer
DarDark
Auto
BrBright
Display Setting (Contd)
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 119
120
Other Setups
Reset to Factory Default
Resets the settings to the factory default (refer to the
Note on this page for the exceptions).
1
Press SETUP.
Easy Setting Menuor Advanced Menuwill appear.
If Advanced Menu is displayed, proceed to step 3.
2
Using / , select Advanced Menu.
Press
ENTER.
3
Using / , select Initial Setup.
Press
ENTER.
4
Using / , select Reset to factory default.
Press
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
5
Using / , select Ye s. Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
6
Using / , select Ye s. Press ENTER.
All setting are now reset to the factory default.
7
Press SETUP to exit.
Yes NoNo
Are yAre you sure?ou sure?
Yes
NoNo
Reset to fReset to factoractory y defefault OK?ault OK?
OSD Language
Clock SettingClock Setting
Channel SettingChannel Setting
PlaybackPlayback
RecordRecord
DisplayDisplay
Reset to factory defaultReset to factory default
DVD MenuDVD Menu
HDD MenuHDD Menu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
HDD MENUHDD MENU
Initial SetupInitial Setup
DVD Disc FVD Disc Forormatmat
DVD Recording FVD Recording Forormatmat
FinalizFinalize
Disc ProtectDisc Protect
Delete PlaDelete Playlistylist
DVD DVD Menuenu
HDD HDD Menuenu
Initial SetupInitial Setup
Timer ProgramTimer Program
Advanced MenuAdvanced Menu
Easy Setting MenuEasy Setting Menu
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
Note
The settings listed below will remain unchanged
even after resetting to the factory default.
- OSD Language Setting
- Clock Setting
- Parental Lock Setting
- Progressive Scan Setting
- HDD/DVD Timer Programs
- HDD Original List / Playlist
4380_110-120.qx3 05.11.16 2:40 PM Page 120
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
121
VCR functions
Press VCR first.
Press DISPLAY to show the information on the display.
1 Playback status
2 Current channel number and an audio status of
the program.This information appears only in
the stop mode.
3 Rec Mode
4 Tape Counter
5 Audio status of the current videotape
0:00:00 HIFISP
CH 21
STEREO
4 53
1
2
VCR
Guide to Display Information (VCR)
Note
This is an example screen only for explanation. Displayed
items will change depending on the actual mode.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 121
122
VCR functions
Recording
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MODE
VCR
REC/OTR
STOP PAUSE
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
Basic Recording
Before recording,make sure:
The desired channel is selected by pressing the
Number Buttons
or CHANNEL / .
There is a videotape with a record tab in the unit.
The desired Rec Mode (SP:Standard Play or SLP: Super
Long Play) is selected by pressing
REC MODE on the
remote control.
Rec Mode
Stereo or SAP is selected. (See page 27.)
Press VCR first.
1
Press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin the recording.
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press
PAUSE F. After the unit has been in pause for five
minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the
videotape and the video head from damage.
2
Press STOP C when the recording is completed.
VCRVCR
VCR
Tape speed
Type of tape
T160T120
Recording / Playback Time
T60
2-2 / 3 hours2 hours
1 hourSP mode
8 hours6 hours3 hoursSLP mode
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a
recorded videotape, remove its record tab.
To record on it later,cover the hole with
cellophane tape.
Record tab
Note
Although you can playback a videotape recorded in
the SP, LP, or SLP mode on this unit, LP mode
recording is not available.
Timer Recording is not available with VCR.
If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in
progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set for
HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will
automatically switch to the programmed channel
15
seconds before the programmed time and the
recording in progress on the VCR will be cancelled
UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording
for HDD or DVD will start without cancelling the
recording currently in progress on the VCR. In this
case, the recording of the same channel will be made
on both VCR and the HDD or DVD.
To view one channel while recording another:
1 If you want to watch the TV programs, simply
select the channel you want to watch with the TVs
remote.
2 If you want to watch the cable TV or the satellite
TV programs, select the channel you want to
watch at the cable box or the satellite box.
T210
3-1 / 2 hours
10-1 / 2 hours
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 122
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
123
VCR functions
Recording (Contd)
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
VCR
REC/OTR
STOP
One Touch Recording
This function allows you to set the recording length simply
by pressing
REC / OTR (VCR).
Press VCR first.
1
During normal recording, press REC / OTR (VCR)
to begin One Touch Recording.
You can select a fixed recording time by pressing
REC / OTR (VCR) repeatedly.
When One Touch Recording is finished, the unit will
turn off automatically.
To change the recording length during the One
Touch Recording, press
REC / OTR (VCR)
repeatedly until the desired length appear.
To cancel the One Touch Recording within the
specified time, press STOP C.
VCRVCR
VCR
(0:30) (1:00)
(Normal recording)
(7:30)(8:00)
Note
The remaining recording time will appear on the
display panel during a One Touch Recording. Press
DISPLAY to see it on the TV screen.
You cannot pause a One Touch Recording.
If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in
progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set for
HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will
automatically switch to the programmed channel
15
seconds before the programmed time and the
recording in progress on the VCR will be cancelled
UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording
for HDD or DVD will start without cancelling the
recording currently in progress on the VCR. In this
case, the recording of the same channel will be made
on both VCR and the HDD or DVD.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 123
124
VCR functions
Playback
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
VCR
PLAY
STOP PAUSE
POWER
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
Channel. (See page 18.)
1
Press POWER on the remote control or the front
panel of the unit.
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
Channel.
Press VCR first.
2
Insert a prerecorded videotape. Press PLAY B to
begin playback.
• If there is no record tab, playback starts
automatically.
3
During playback, press PAUSE F.
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
4
Press PLAY B to resume playback.
5
Press STOP C to stop playback.
6
Press STOP / EJECT C A on the front panel of the
unit to eject the videotape.
VCRVCR
VCR
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
STOP / EJECT C A
POWER
Note
Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon playback.To
adjust the tracking manually, press
CHANNEL /.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 4:21 PM Page 124
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
125
VCR functions
Search
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
VCR
SEARCH MODE
REV FWD
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
Index Search
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of each
recording you make. You may skip to a specific marked point
by following the steps below.
Press VCR first.
1
Press SEARCH MODE so that the Index Input
Screen will appear.
2
Using the Number Buttons,enter the number of
recordings you wish to skip within 30 seconds.
To exit the Index Input Screen, press
STOP C.
3
Press FWD g / REV h to start the Index
Search.
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
FWD g.
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
REV h.
After index search, the VCR will play the videotape
automatically.
Pro.1 Pro.2 Pro.3 Pro.4 Pro.5
02 01 01 02 03
Beginning
of tape
End
of tape
CURRENT PROGRAM
INDEX MARK
INDEX SEARCH
03
VCR
VCR
VCR
Note
Every time a videotape is recorded, an index mark is
written on the videotape.
Index Search and Time Search are not available during
recording.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 125
126
VCR functions
Search (Contd)
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SLOW PAUSE
CLEAR
CHANNEL
VCR
SEARCH MODE
REV FWD
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SLOW PAUSE
CLEAR
CHANNEL
Time Search
This function allows you to go to a specific point on a video-
tape by entering the exact amount of time you wish to skip
in order to reach the point.
Press VCR first.
1
Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly so that the Time
Input Screen will appear.
2
Using the Number Buttons,enter your desired
time to skip with in 30 seconds.
To exit the Index Input Screen, press
STOP C.
3
Press FWD g or REV h to start Time Search.
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
FWD g.
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
REV h.
After Time Search, the unit will play the videotape
automatically.
TIME SEARCH
2:50
VCR
VCR
VCR
Note
Index Search and Time Search are not available during
recording.
Press
STOP C to stop the search.
If the end of the videotape is reached during a
search, this unit will cancel the search and rewind the
videotape.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 126
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
127
VCR functions
Other Operations
Press VCR first.
Fast forward:
When the unit is in stop mode, press FWD g to fast for-
ward the videotape.
Rewind:
When the unit is in stop mode, press REV h to rewind
the videotape.
To cue or review picture during playback
(Picture Search):
Press FWD g or REV h during playback.
Press it again and the unit will search in super high speed. (in
the SLP mode only)
To freeze the picture on the TV screen during
playback (Still mode):
Press PAUSE F. Each time you press the button, the pic-
ture will be forwarded by one frame.
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still
mode, stabilize the picture by pressing
CHANNEL / .
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the ver-
tical hold control on your TV, if equipped.
Counter Reset:
Press CLEAR.
To playback in slow motion:
Press SLOW during playback or the still mode.
If the noise bars appear on the TV screen, you can reduce it
by pressing
CHANNEL / .
Automatic rewind
When a videotape is played or fast forwarded to its end,the
videotape will rewind to the beginning,stop and eject itself.
Setting the Playback audio:
Press AUDIO on the remote control to select Hi-Fi or
MONO as your playback audio.
If the unit is connected to a stereo TV,select
HIFI.
If the unit is connected to a monaural TV, select
MONO.
If the videotape is recorded in monaural,the audio
mode is fixed to the monaural and cannot be changed.
VCRVCR
VCR
Note
Still / slow / pause mode will be automatically
cancelled after 5 minutes to prevent damage to the
videotape and the video head.
To return to playback from the Picture Search / Still /
Slow mode, press
PLAY B.
HIFI
Your Selection
Type of recorded tape
non Hi-Fi tapes
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded in
Hi-Fi stereo
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded second
audio program
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded main
audio program
MONO
Monaural
L+R
Main audio
program
Second audio
program
Monaural
R-channelL-channel
R
Main audio
program
Second audio
program
Monaural
L
Main audio
program
Second audio
program
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 127
128
Others
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing. Some
simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper performance.
General Operation
Discs
Timer Recording / Recording & Navigator
Error
Prohibited timer program.
Error message Cause & Solution
The entry for the Timer Recording is invalid. The recording duration must
be in 24 hour period. The end time must be later than the present time,
and the start time must be before 1-1-2055. Re-program the Timer
Recording correctly. (See pages 42-43.)
Error
Cannot register timer program.
The maximum number of timer programs is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary timer programs. (See pages 42-43.)
Disc Error
Error message Cause & Solution
Invalid disc is inserted. Please insert a disc supported by this unit.
(See pages 29 and 66.)
Region Error
Please eject the disc.
Playback is not authorized
in your region.
Error
Un-finalize cannot be performed.
Error
Disc protect cannot be performed.
A disc with the invalid region code is inserted.
This unit only supports the discs with region code 1 or ALL.
The finalization of the Video mode DVD discs made on other unit
cannot be undone.
Disc Protect is only available with the VR mode DVD-RW discs.
Other discs cannot be protedcted. (See page 62.)
Error
Please insert a valid disc.
No disc or an invalid disc is inserted. Please insert a disc supported
by this unit. (See pages 29 and 66.)
Error
Cannot finalize.
The discs not supported by this unit cannot be finalized.
Please use the discs supported by this unit. (See page 29.)
Error
Cannot format.
The discs not supported by this unit cannot be formatted.
Please use the discs supported by this unit. (See page 29.)
During HDD playback or recording, formatting will not be executed.
Stop the playback or recording.
Error
Now Recording.
Error
Now Dubbing.
Error
Timer program starts soon.
Error message Cause & Solution
The operation is not available.
The operation is not available during recording.
The operation is not available during dubbing.
The operation is not available since a Timer Recording will start soon.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 128
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
129
Others
Troubleshooting (Contd)
Playback / Editing
Error message Cause & Solution
Error
The number of chapters is maximum.
Error
Program Edit Error.
The number of programs
in playlist is maximum.
The maximum number of chapters is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary chapter marks. (See pages 106-107.)
The maximum number of titles in the Playlist is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary titles in the Playlist. (See pages 92, 98-99.)
Error
Program Edit Error.
The number of titles is maximum.
The maximum number of titles is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary titles. (See pages 90-91.)
Parental Lock On
The current selected parental level
prohibits playback.
The current Parental Lock setting prohibits the playback.
Change the Parental Level. (See page 113.)
Dubbing
Error message Cause & Solution
Error
Cannot select program.
Error
Copy guard detected.
Dubbing is stopped.
Error
HDD remaining space error
Dubbing cannot be performed.
Error
DVD remaining space error
Dubbing cannot be performed.
You are trying to add more than 32 titles to the Dubbing List.
Or the number of the titles or the chapters of the recording media exceeds
the max. Delete unnecessary titles or the chapters from the list.
The recording function encountered a copy control signal.
You cannot dub copy protected programs.
There is not enough space left on the HDD to finish the dubbing.
Delete the unnecessary titles in the Original List, or change the Rec Mode.
There is not enough space left on the DVD to finish the dubbing.
Insert a recordable DVD, delete the unnecessary titles in the Original List,
or change the Rec Mode.
Error
Timer programmed.
No dubbing now.
The dubbing you are trying to make does not finish by 3 minutes before
the Timer Recording. Re-arrange the timer programs, or try dubbing
when there is no Timer Recording in standby.
Error
Cannot dubbing now.
No recording media is inside the unit. Insert the recordable media.
Recordable space is not enough. Make sure the recording media has enough space.
The device is in use for playback or recording. Stop the playback or recording.
The dubbing material is copy protected. You cannot dub the copy protected material.
You are trying to dub to the finalized Video mode DVD. You cannot dub to
the finalized Video mode DVDs.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 129
130
Others
Troubleshooting (Contd)
Symptom Solution
P
O
W
E
R
The power does not turn on. Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.
Batteries of the remote control are weak.
I
f above solutions do not work, press RESET on the front panel
with a sharp pointed object to re-start the unit. (See page 10.)
The unit turns on automatically without
any operation.
During Auto Clock Setting, the POWER Light lights up.
The unit turns on automatically 3 minutes before the Timer
Recording.
The power turns off automatically . The power turns off automatically when abnormality is
detected on the disc. Press POWER or OPEN / CLOSE A
to open the disc tray, and before it is opened completely, press
the button again. Then take out the disc.
The power turns off automatically when an OTR is completed.
There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try
pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object
to re-start the unit.
(See page 10.)
The OSD Language Setting Menu appears
every time the power turns on.
Finish up the Language Setting procedure by selecting a
language in the OSD Language Setting Menu. Press ENTER to
activate the setting.
Symptom Solution
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
The unit does not function. or error message appears if the operation is prohibited.
Batteries of the remote control are weak or exhausted
There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try
pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object
to re-start the unit.
(See page 10.)
Clock Setting and Channel Setting cannot
be performed.
If a Timer Recording is in standby or if a recording is in
progress, these operations cannot be performed. Delete timer
programs or stop the recording.
No picture, sound or menu appears on
the screen.
Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
Check if the cables are not damaged.
Check if a correct external input channel is selected on your
TV. (See page 18.)
Check if you have comleted the Channel Setting.
The unit does not operate properly. Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and
leave the unit turned on for about two hours until the moisture
evaporates. (See page 4.)
The abnormal display appears
in the Front Panel Display.
There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try
pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object
to re-start the unit.
(See page 10.)
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 130
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
131
Others
Troubleshooting (Contd)
Symptom Solution
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
TV channels cannot be changed. Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
Check if the cables are not damaged.
Try Channel Setting by following the steps on pages 22-23.
Only specific channels do not appear. The channels may be set to be skipped.
The external input channels (such as
L1 or L2) cannot be skipped.
This unit does not skip the external input channels.
This is not a malfunction.
Symptom Solution
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
TV channels cannot be changed. Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
Check if the cables are not damaged.
Try Channel Setting by following the steps on pages 22-23.
Only specific channels do not appear. The channels may be set to be skipped.
The external input channels (such as
L1 or L2) cannot be skipped.
This unit does not skip the external input channels.
This is not a malfunction.
Symptom Solution
R
E
C
O
R
D
I
N
G
Recording is impossible.
This unit cannot record a program that contains copy protection
signal. This is not a malfunction.
The space of the recording media may be used up. Try deleting
unnecessary titles from the Original List, or exchange it with
the recordable media.
The maximum number of titles or chapters has exceeded.
Delete the unnecessary titles to make enough space or insert a
new recordable media.
Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
Copy-once programs can only be recorded on a CPRM
compatible VR mode DVD-RW.
Check if the disc is not protected or finalized.
Undo the protection or the finalization.
DVD-RW once formatted with other DVD recorders cannot
be recorded on this unit. This is not malfunction.
Video mode DVDs recorded by other DVD recorders cannot
be used on this unit unless finalized.
Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
The image from the external device
cannot be displayed or recorded.
The internal clock of the unit may have been stopped due to a
power failure that lasted for more than 30 seconds. Reset the
clock. (See pages 24-26.)
Recording on the DVD disc is impossible.
Try pressing INPUT SELECT repeatedly.
Turn on the all connected devices.
Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
Timer Recording cannot be performed.
Recording to a videotape is impossible. Check if a videotape is inserted.
Check if a videotape has a record tab intact.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 131
132
Others
Troubleshooting (Contd)
Symptom Solution
P
L
A
Y
B
A
C
K
Disc Playback cannot be performed.
Check if the recordable disc is inserted.
Check if the disc is loaded correctly with the labeled
side facing up.
Discs made on other devices or on personal computers cannot
be played back on this unit unless it is finalized on the device.
Even if it is finalized, the performance of those discs are not
guranteed on this unit.
The disc may be dirty or flawed. Clean the disc.
Check if all the connections are made correctly.
Check if the setting for the Progressive Scan is correct.
(See page 117.)
Check the Parental Lock Setting. (See page 113.)
Playback does not start from
the beginning.
Resume function may be activated. See page 72 to cancel the
resume point.
TV aspect ratio does not match
for your TV screen.
Check the TV Aspect Ratio. (See page28)
A different aspect ratio will be used when the aspect ratio
specified by the disc is not supported by this unit.
There is no sound, or no subtitle.
Turn on all connected devices.
Check if the external input channel is set correctly.
Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
Check if the Audio Out Setting is set correctly. (See page 115)
There is a possibility that the selected subtitle language is not
supported by the disc.
Playback picture is distorted.
Color of the picture is abnormal.
During fast forward or fast reverse, playback picture may be
distored. This is not a malfunction.
Connect to TV directly. When you connect this unit with the
television via VCR or other devices, the pictue may be distorted
due to the copy-protection signal.
Check if the cables are damaged.
Keep the equipment which may cause electrical disturbances,
such as a cellular phone, away.
Audio Out Setting can not be changed. If the audio source is in the Dolby Digital format, set the Dolby
Digital Setting to PCM in the Setup Menu.
(See page 115)
Audio Language or the Subtitle Language
of the DVD can not be changed.
Multilingual subtitles are not supported by the disc.
Some audio languages or the subtitle languages can be changed only
from the Disc Menu. Please refer to the discs manual.
Camera angles can not be changed.
Even though the multi-angle feature is supported by the disc,
that does not mean all the scenes are shot from multi-angles.
Changing angles are available only for those scenes shot from
the multi-angle.
VCR picture is noisy.
During VCR playback, pictures do not
come out even though sound does.
Adjust the tracking by pressing CHANNEL o
/
p while you
are playing a videotape.
VCR Head cleaning may be necessary.
Refer to 'AUTO HEAD CLEANING' on page 136.
* If you are still having trouble with this unit after checking Troubleshooting, write down the error code and the error
description, and call our helpline mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized Service Center.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 132
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
133
Others
Troubleshooting (Contd)
Symptom Solution
E
D
I
T
I
N
G
Titles can not be edited or deleted.
The titles or the disc itself may be protected. Cancel the
protection by following the steps on page 93 for title
protection, and page 62 for disc protection.
The titles in the Video mode discs cannot be edited or deleted
if they are finalized. Undo the finalization by following the steps
on page 63.
With Video mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will increase
only when the last title in the Original List is deleted. With
DVD-R discs, deleting a title will not increase the disc space.
Deleting a title in the Playlist will not increase the capacity, try
deleting a title in the Original List.
The capacity of the disc doesn't increase
even if the recorded program is deleted.
The disc cannot be played back on other
player even though it is finalized properly.
Some DVD players do not play back the disc made on other
recorder. Refer to the manual of the palyer.
Dubbing cannot be executed.
Video mode discs made on other recorder cannot be dubbed
using this unit.
When the number of the titles or the chapters exceeds the
maximum recordable number, the dubbing will not be executed.
Copy-once programs or the copy protected programs may not
be dubbed depending on the recording media.
Regarding the limitations on dubbing, refer to the page 47.
Symptom Solution
R
E
M
O
T
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
The remote control does not function.
Pressing SETUP does not do anything.
No batteries in the remote or the batteries may be weak.
Replace the batteries.
Make sure there is no obstacle between the remote and the
unit.
Try getting closer to the unit. (See page 15.)
Make sure to press the Device Select Button before operating
on the device of your choice.
If above solutions do not solve the problem, please call our
helpline mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized
Sercive Center for help.
While the Programmed Recordings Screen, the Dubbing Menu
Screen, or the Title List is displayed or while the disc is loading,
the SETUP button does not respond.
Symptom Solution
O
T
H
E
R
S
The Clock display does not appear
in the Front Panel Display.
Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.
(In case of power failure) Check the breaker and Clock Setting.
When you forget the password
for Parental Lock.
Please cancel the password and the set level. (See page 113.)
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 133
134
Others
Glossary
Analog audio
An electrical signal that directly represents
sound. In contrast,digital audio which can be
an electrical signal,but is an indirect repre-
sentation of sound. See also Digital audio.
Aspect ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its
height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other
words, the screen is almost square);
widescreen models are
16:9 (the screen is
almost twice as wide as it is high).
Chapter
Just as a book is split up into several
chapters,a title on a DVD disc is usually
divided into chapters. See also Title.
Component video output
This is a video signal format that conveys
each of three principal colors of light (red,
blue and green) through different signal
lines. This allows the viewers to experi-
ence picture colors as original as it is.
There are several signal formats, including
Y / P
B / PR and Y / CB / CR.
CPRM (Content Protection for
Recordable Media)
This is a format used to record copy-once
programs. By recording coded data on
the area of DVD discs that ordinary writ-
ing software cannot write on,it prevents
copy-once programs from being recorded
repeatedly on different media.
Digital audio
An indirect representation of sound by
numbers. During recording, the sound
is measured at discrete intervals (44,
100 times a second for CD audio) by
an analog-to-digital converter,generat-
ing a stream of numbers. On playback,
a digital-to-analog converter generates
an analog signal based on these num-
bers. See also Sampling frequency and
Analog audio.
Dolby Digital
The system developed by Dolby
Laboratories to compress digital sound.
It offers you sound of stereo (2ch) or
multi-channel audio.
Finalize
To make recorded contents on DVD
discs possible to be played back on DVD
players. With this unit, it is possible to
finalize DVD-RW/R discs.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
MP3 is a method of compressing files.
You can copy MP3 files on CD-RW / R
discs from the computer and play back
the files on this unit.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a format that converts audio
into digital data. It is mainly used for
Audio CDs and DAT. This unit can play
back sounds as realistic as possible by
converting even compressed Dolby
Digital and MPEG audio to PCM.
Playlist
From this list you can play back con-
tents of a disc in your desired order or
sequence. Also it allows to search a
specific scene directly.
Progressive scan (480p)
A type of display that does not split
each frame into fields, and instead scans
directly through all the scanlines of
each frame in order.Progressive scan
provides less flickering and higher
image resolution than traditional (480i)
TV signals.
See page
17 for instructions on selec-
tive progressive scan mode.
Regions code
Regions associate discs and players with
particular areas of the world. This unit
will only play back discs that have com-
patible region codes. You can find the
region code of your unit by looking at the
rear panel. Some discs are compatible
with more than one region (or all
regions).
Sampling frequency
The rate which sound is measured by a
specified interval to turn it into digital
audio data. The numbers of sampling in
one second defines as sampling fre-
quency. The higher the rate, the better
the sound quality is.
SAP (Secondary Audio Program)
Sub-audio channel which is delivered sep-
arately from main-audio channel. This
audio channel is used as an alternate in
bilingual broadcasting.
S-Video output
It delivers independently each signal of
color(C) and luminance(Y) to TV as video
signals, so that higher-quality picture will
be materialised.
Title (DVD only)
A collection of chapters on DVD disc.
See also chapter.
Track
Audio CDs use tracks to divide the con-
tent of a disc. The DVD equivalent is
called a chapter. See also Chapter.
WMA
WMA is the audio file compressing
technology developed by Microsoft.
You can copy WMA files on CD-RW /
R discs from a computer and play them
back on this unit.
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 134
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
135
Others
Language Code
Language Code Language Code Language CodeLanguage Code
Abkhazian 4748
Afar 4747
Afrikaans 4752
Albanian 6563
Amharic 4759
Arabic 4764
Armenian 5471
Assamese 4765
Aymara 4771
Azerbaijani 4772
Bashkir 4847
Basque 5167
Bengali;Bangla 4860
Bhutani 5072
Bihari 4854
Bislama 4855
Breton 4864
Bulgarian 4853
Burmese 5971
Byelorussian 4851
Cambodian 5759
Catalan 4947
Chinese 7254
Corsican 4961
Croatian 5464
Czech 4965
Danish 5047
Dutch 6058
English 5160
Esperanto 5161
Estonian 5166
Faroese 5261
Fiji 5256
Finnish 5255
French 5264
Frisian 5271
Galician 5358
Georgian 5747
German 5051
Greek 5158
Greenlandic 5758
Guarani 5360
Gujarati 5367
Hausa 5447
Hebrew 5569
Hindi 5455
Hungarian 5467
Icelandic 5565
Indonesian 5560
Interlingua 5547
Interlingue 5551
Inupiak 5557
Irish 5347
Italian 5566
Japanese 5647
Javanese 5669
Kannada 5760
Kashmiri 5765
Kazakh 5757
Kinyarwanda 6469
Kirghiz 5771
Kirundi 6460
Korean 5761
Kurdish 5767
Laothian 5861
Latin 5847
Latvian; Lettish 5868
Lingala 5860
Sindhi 6550
Singhalese 6555
Siswat 6565
Slovak 6557
Slovenian 6558
Somali 6561
Spanish 5165
Sundanese 6567
Swahili 6569
Swedish 6568
Tagalog 6658
Tajik 6653
Tamil 6647
Tatar 6666
Telugu 6651
Thai 6654
Tibetan 4861
Tigrinya 6655
Tonga 6661
Tsonga 6665
Turkish 6664
Turkmen 6657
Twi 6669
Ukrainian 6757
Urdu 6764
Uzbek 6772
Vietnamese 6855
Volapuk 6861
Welsh 4971
Wolof 6961
Xhosa 7054
Yiddish 5655
Yoruba 7161
Zulu 7267
Lithuanian 5866
Macedonian 5957
Malagasy 5953
Malay 5965
Malayalam 5958
Maltese 5966
Maori 5955
Marathi 5964
Moldavian 5961
Mongolian 5960
Nauru 6047
Nepali 6051
Norwegian 6061
Occitan 6149
Oromo (Afan) 6159
Oriya 6164
Panjabi 6247
Pashto; Pushto 6265
Persian 5247
Polish 6258
Portuguese 6266
Quechua 6367
Rhaeto-Romance 6459
Romanian 6461
Russian 6467
Samoan 6559
Sangho 6553
Sanskrit 6547
Scots Gaelic 5350
Serbian 6564
Serbo-Croatian 6554
Sesotho 6566
Setswana 6660
Shona 6560
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 135
136
Others
Maintenance
SERVICING
Please refer to relevant topics on the Troubleshooting on pages 128133 before returning the product.
If this unit becomes inoperative, do not try to correct the problem by yourself. There are no user-serviceable parts
inside. Turn off, unplug the power plug and please call our help line mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized
Service Center.
CLEANING THE CABINET
Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing alcohol,spirits,
ammonia or abrasive.
HDD HANDLING
HDD is a precision apparatus that is susceptible to vibration, strong impact or dirt.
Depending on the installation environment or handling, the unit may become partially damaged or in the worst case,
recording or replaying may not be available. Especially while the HDD is in motion, do not subject it to vibration or
strong impact or pull out the power plug. And if a power failure occurs the content of the recording/replaying pro-
gram may be lost.
MOVING THE UNIT
HDD rotates at high speed when in operation. Be sure that rotation has stopped and then move the unit without
subjecting it to strong impact or vibration.
CLEANING DISCS
When a disc becomes dirty,clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in a circu-
lar motion.
Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive cleaning agents or
antistatic spray intended for analogue records.
CLEANING THE DISC LENS
If this unit still does not perform properly although you refer to the relevant sections and to Troubleshooting in this
Owners Manual,the laser optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult your dealer or an Authorized Service Center for
inspection and cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.
DISC HANDLING
Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not adhere to the surfaces of the discs.
Always store the disc in its protective case when it is not used.
AUTO HEAD CLEANING
Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or remove a videotape, so you can see a clear picture.
Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted while the TV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulated on
the video heads after a long period of use, or the usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If a streaky
or snowy picture appears during playback,the video heads in the unit may need to be cleaned.
1. Please visit your local Audio / Video store and purchase a good quality VHS Video Head Cleaner.
2. If a Video Head Cleaner does not solve the problem, please call our help line mentioned on the front page to locate
an Authorized Service Center.
NOTES:
Remember to read the instructions along with the video head cleaner before use.
Clean video heads only when problems occur.
VCR
DVD
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 136
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
137
Others
Frequently Asked Questions
Specification
–– Can I record on CD-R / RW?
No, this unit records only DVDs.
–– Can I play back DVD-Video that is bought in another country?
Possible only if the region code of the disc is
1 or ALL.
–– Is this unit JPEG compatible?
No.
–– Can I connect the unit to my PC?
No, you cannot control the unit by PCs.
Recording
Input/Output
Recording format
Recordable discs
Video Recording Format (DVD-RW only),
Video Format (DVD-RW, DVD-R)
DVD-ReWritable,
DVD-Recordable
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency
Compression format
Video recording format
Sampling frequency
Compression format
13.5MHz
MPEG
48kHz
Dolby Digital
Video input
Input level
Jacks
Video output
Output level
Jacks
S-Video input
Y (Iuminance)
- Input level
C (color)
- Input level
Jacks
S-Video output
Y (Iuminance)
- Output level
C (color)
- Output level
Jack
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
1 Vp-p (75)
RCA jack
1 Vp-p (75)
RCA jack
Component video output
Output level
Jacks
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75),
P
B/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75)
RCA jacks
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
1 Vp-p (75)
286 mVp-p (75)
4 pin mini DIN
Audio input
During audio input
Jacks
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
2V rms (47k)
RCA jacks
Audio output
During audio output
Jacks
Output 1,2 L/R
2V rms (47k)
RCA jacks
Digital audio output
Output level
Jack
500 mVp-p (75)
RCA jack
1 Vp-p (75)
286 mVp-p (75)
4 pin mini DIN
VHF/UHF antenna
input/output terminal
VHF/UHF set 75
System
VCR video heads
HDD
Power requirements
Power consumption
Weight
HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-RW/R, CD-DA,
CD-RW/R, VCR
Four heads
Internal 3.5 inch HDD 160 GB
AC120 V, 60 Hz
44 W (standby: 4.6 W)
12.2 lbs ( 5.6 kg )
General
Receivable channels
VHF
UHF
CATV
2-13ch
14-69ch
C1-C125ch
Tuner
Note
The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
TV format
17 1/8" x 3 15/16" x 14 15/16"
(435 x 99.5 x 380 mm)
41ºF to 104ºF (5ºC to 40ºC)
less than 80% (non condensing)
NTSC
4380_121-137.qx3 05.11.16 2:42 PM Page 137
138
Español
Descripción Funcional
1 POWER
2 Luz de POWER
3 Luz de REC/OTR (VCR)
4 Compartimiento de casete
5
Luz de Doblaje
6 OPEN / CLOSE
A * (DVD)
7 Luz de REC/OTR (HDD/DVD)
8 Bandeja de disco
9 AUDIO IN (LINEA 2)
10 VIDEO IN (LINEA 2)
11 S-VIDEO IN (LINEA 2)
12 RESET
13 REC / OTR I (HDD / DVD)
14 PLAY B * (HDD / DVD)
15 STOP C * (HDD / DVD)
16 Botones Selección de
Dispositivo / Indicadores
(VCR/HDD/DVD)
17 DUBBING HDDDVD
18 DUBBING VCRDVD
19 CHANNEL K / L
20 Pantalla del Panel Delantero
21 Sensor de control remoto
22 REC / OTR I (VCR)
23 PLAY B (VCR)
24 F.FWD D (VCR)
25 REW
E (VCR)
26 STOP / EJECT
CA(VCR)
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEO
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
RESET
1
4
2 6* 8
9101113
14*
15*
18
1721
22
1923
24
25
26 16
12
3
5 7
20
*
La unidad también puede encen-
derse presionando estos botones.
Panel Delantero
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
1 789
2
3456
101112
1 Cable eléctrico de CA
2 S-VIDEO IN (LINEA
1)
3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(HDD / DVD)
4 AUDIO IN (LINEA
1)
5 AUDIO OUT
6 TV ANTENNA IN
7 TV ANTENNA OUT
8 VIDEO OUT
9 VIDEO IN (LINEA
1)
10 S-VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD)
11 AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD)
12 COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT (HDD / DVD)
Panel trasero
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
456
PQRS
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
TUV
SPACE
SETUP
MENU/LIST
DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE
REPLAY
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
PAUSESTOP
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
WXYZ
78
0
9
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10*
11
12
13
14
15
16
17*
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27*
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
*
En HDD / DVD
La unidad también
puede encenderse
presionando estos
botones.
1 POWER
2 Botones Numéricos
3 PROGRAM RECORDINGS
4 SETUP
5 MENU / LIST (HDD / DVD)
6 Cursor
/ / /
7 DISPLAY
8 SKIP
j / i (HDD / DVD)
9 REV
E
10 PLAY B *
11 SLOW (VCR)
12 REC MONITOR
(HDD / DVD)
13 REC MODE
14 DUBBING MENU
15 TIMER PROG.
16 INPUT SELECT
17 OPEN / CLOSE EJECT A
(DVD / VCR) *
18 CHANNEL /
19 CLEAR
2
0 AUDIO
2
1 TOP MENU (HDD / DVD)
22 ENTER
23 RETURN
24 VARIABLE SKIP
(HDD / DVD)
25 VARIABLE REPLAY
(HDD / DVD)
26 FWD
D
27 STOP C *
28 PAUSE
F
Botones Selección de
Dispositivo
:
29 VCR
3
0 HDD
3
1 DVD
32 REC / OTR (VCR)
33 REC / OTR (HDD)
34 REC / OTR (DVD)
35 SEARCH MODE (VCR)
Control
remoto
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:43 PM Page 138
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
Español
Conexión a un TV
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
COAXIAL
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD/VCR
IN
OUT
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
D
D/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
PB/CB
Y
PR/CR
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
VIDEO IN
Calidad de la imagen
Básico Bueno Mejor
HDD/DVD
VV VV VV
VCR
VV
(necesario)
--
Haga una de las siguientes conexiones, según la capacidad de su equipo existente.
AUDIO OUT
TV
Cable de
audio
(entregado)
Esta unidad
Estas tomas sólo son útiles
en el modo HDD / DVD.
/
DVD
HDD/DVD
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
HDD/DVD/VCR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
IN
Y
P
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
OUT
HDD/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
L
R
AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
OUT
VIDEO OUT
L
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
(Atrás del TV)
o
Señal de
TV cable
o
Señal de
TV cable
Conecte
Desconecte
Antena
Antena
(Atrás de esta unidad)
(Atrás del TV)
Cable RF
(entregado)
Conecte
3
2
1
4
Enchufe el
cable
eléctrico de
esta unidad.
Conexion de Audio Básico
Conexiones de video
(
VV
= Hay,
-
= No hay)
O
TV
Esta unidad
Si su TV es compatible con el escaneo progresivo 525 ó 625 y desea disfrutar de la imagen de alta calidad;
Utilice la conexión COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, ajuste el Progresivoa On en el Menú de Preparación (vea la
página
117) y asegúrese que la indicación P.SCAN está activada en la Pantalla del Panel Delantero.
Si su TV no es compatible con el escaneo progresivo;
Si su TV no es compatible con el escaneo progresivo ajuste Progresivoa Off en el Menú de Preparación y
asegúrese que la indicación
P.SCAN está activada en la Pantalla del Panel Delantero.
O
Después de terminar las conexiones
Encienda su TV al canal de entrada externo adecuado (normalmente cerca del canal 0) para ver la salida de imágenes de
esta unidad en el TV. Para encontrar el canal de entrada externo, presione repetidamente el botón de canal en el remoto
de su TV hasta que aparezca la imagen de la grabadora de DVD.
139
Nota
Puede conectar a un TV
con cables A/V o cable RF.
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Cable de video
componente
(en venta en los
comercios)
VIDEO OUT
Cable Video
(entregado)
Cable
S-Video
(en venta en
los
comercios)
(Compatible con el
modo de escaneo
progresivo)
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 3:48 PM Page 139
140
Español
Configuraciones iniciales
Primera vez que encienda la unidad
1
Después de hacer todas las conexiones necesarias
encienda el TV y seleccione el canal de entrada
externo adecuado. (vea la página
139.)
2
Presione POWER. Aparecerá la pantalla de abajo.
Este menú puede no aparecer si ya activó la unidad
antes.Vea las páginas 2
1-24 del Manual de
Instrucciones en este caso.
Si presiona
PLAY B en este punto, se seleccionará
automáticamente
Englishy puede saltear los
pasos 3 y 4.
3
Presione / para seleccionar English,
Françaiso Español. Presione ENTER.
Después de seleccionar el idioma,la Configuración
Automática de Canales empezará automáticamente.
4
Después de terminar la Configuración Automática de
Canales de Canales, se activará automáticamente la Función
Automática de Reloj y se ajustará a la hora correcta.
EnglishEnglish
Français
OSD LanguageOSD Language
EspaEspañol
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
POWER
Ajuste de audio del TV
1
Presione SETUP.
2
Utilice / para seleccionar Config.Inic..
Presione
ENTER.
3
Utilice / para seleccionar Configur.Canal.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá el Menú de Configuración de Canal.
4
Utilice / para seleccionar
Selec. de Audio de TV. Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de Opciones.
5
Utilice / para seleccionar Estéreoo SAP.
Presione
ENTER.
Estéreo:
Sale audio principal.
SAP (Programa de Audio Secundario):
Sale el audio secundario.
6
Presione SETUP para salir.
SAPSAP
EstEstéreo
Selec.Selec. de Audio de TVTV
Selec.Selec. de Audio de TVTV
Ajuste ManAjuste Manualual
Ajuste AAjuste Auto
ConfigurConfigur. Canal Canal
Notas para el audio del canal de TV
Consulte el siguiente cuadro para comprobar una
configuración adecuada.
Canal audio Canal audio
principal secundario
ESTÉREO SAP ESTÉREO
ESTÉREO NONE ESTÉREO
MONO SAP MONO
MONO NONE MONO
ESTÉREO SAP SAP
ESTÉREO NONE ESTÉREO
MONO SAP SAP
MONO NONE MONO
Estéreo
SAP
Audio transmitido
Audio
seleccionado
Grabación de
HDD/DVD/VCR
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:43 PM Page 140
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
141
Español
Grabación en HDD / DVD
Recordable disc
Discos que pueden utilizarse con esta grabadora:
Disco DVD-R: hasta 16x (se recomienda un disco de 4x u 8x)
Disco DVD-RW:2x y 4x (se recomienda un disco de 2x)
Discos inspeccionados y prueban que son compatibles con esta
grabadora:
MAXELL discos DVD-R 4x
TDK discos DVD-RW 2x
JVC discos DVD-RW 4x
MITSUBISHI discos DVD-R 8x
Los reproductores de DVD con son capaces de repro-
ducir discos DVD-RW grabados en el modo de VR.
Tipo de disco
Formato de disco
Modo de Video
Modo de VR
Modo de Video
Funciones
Reproducción, grabación,
edición limitada
Reproducción, grabación,
edición de Lista Original /
Playlist
Reproducción, grabación
limitada, edición limitada
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-R
DVD-R
Formateado de un disco
El tipo de formato de grabación seleccionado aquí se
memorizará y aplicará al disco siempre que formatee los
discos DVD-RW.
1
Presione SETUP.
2
Utilice / para seleccionar Menú DVD.
Presione
ENTER.
3
Utilice / para seleccionar Formato grabac. DVD.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de Opciones.
4
Utilice / para seleccionar VR o Video.
Presione ENTER.
Format Auto
Cuando coloque un disco DVD-RW completamente nuevo,
la unidad formateará automáticamente el disco en el tipo de
formato de grabación seleccionado en esta sección.
Formato gmato grabac.abac. DVDVD
VRVR
VideoVideo
VCR HDD DVD
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
SETUP
ENTER
Modo gra
Puede seleccionar un Modo gra entre las seis opciones y el
tiempo de grabación y la cualidad de imagen/audio del
material grabado depende del Modo gra seleccionado.
Para seleccionar el Modo gra preferido,presione
repetidamente
REC MODE.
(malo)
(bueno)
Modo
gra
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Tiempo de
grabación
18 min
36 min
72 min
108 min
144 min
180 min
Calidad de
video/Sonido
Tamaño
de disco
Disco de
8 cm
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
60 min
120 min
240 min
360 min
480 min
600 min
34 H
68 H
136 H
204 H
272 H
340 H
Disco de
12cm
HDD
(Interno)
(malo)
(malo)
(bueno)
(bueno)
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:43 PM Page 141
142
Español
Grabación en HDD / DVD (Cont.)
Grabación básica
Lo siguiente le ayudará a entender fácilmente cómo grabar en HDD interno o en DVD.
Asegúrese que hay pilas en el control remoto y que ha conectado correctamente esta unidad y el TV.
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
Paso 1:
Elija el tipo de disco y el Formato de grabac.
(Sólo si está grabando a un DVD.)
o
Paso 5: Empiece a grabar.
Cuando graba en HDD:
Presione
REC / OTR (HDD).
Cuando graba en DVD:
Presione
REC / OTR (DVD).
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAU S E
REC/OTR
I
HDD Gra 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
MODO HDD
Paso 6: Pare la grabación.
SKIP
REPLAY SKIP
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP
REV FWDPLAY
PAUSE
I
HDD Det. grab 0:06:50 CH8
65:56LP
C
MODO HDD
Esta operación puede
demorar en reconocerse.
Paso 4:
Seleccione el canal que desea
grabar.
CH 8
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS
PROGRAM
TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
Paso 3:
Seleccione el modo de grabación.
HDD CH8
65:56LP
SLOW
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
STOP PAUSE
Paso 2: Preparación del medio
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
CHANNEL
123
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
4 Cierre la bandeja del
disco.
1 Para encender.
Puede demorar en
cargar el disco.
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
3 Abra la bandeja del disco y
coloque un disco en la bandeja.
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR
HDD DVD
REC/OTR
REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
POWER
.@/: ABC DEF
GHI JKL MNO
CHANNEL
123
4
PQRS TUV
SPACE
WXYZ
789
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
56
0
Si carga un disco DVD-RW completamente nuevo, el Formato Auto empezará automáticamente.
2 Seleccione el equipo que desea
utilizar. (Si está grabando en HDD,
salte desde el paso 3.)
Nota
El HDD es un lugar de memorización temporal.
El HDD no es un lugar de memoria permanente del contenido grabado. Asegúrese de utilizar como lugar de
memoria temporal hasta que mire los programas una vez, edite o copie en un disco DVD o videocinta.
Disco duro de 160 GB
•Esta unidad tiene un disco duro de 160 GB que permite grabar hasta 340 horas (en el modo SEP).
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.17 10:23 AM Page 142
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
143
Español
Grabación en HDD / DVD (Cont.)
Doblaje básico
Se mostró como ejemplo en la figura el doblaje de HDD a
DVD.Consulte el Manual de instrucciones sobre la forma de
hacer otros tipos de doblaje.
1
Presione DUBBING MENU.
Aparecerán el Sentido doblaje y el Menú de Modo gra.
2
Utilice / y seleccione el sentido de doblaje
deseado y presione
ENTER.
Ejemplo: HDD
DVD
3
Utilice / y seleccione el Modo gra deseado.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá el Menú Superior de Doblaje.
4
Utilice / para seleccionar Selec programa.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá la Lista de programa.
Lista doblaje
Lista progr. (Or (Original)
1 1 Títuloulo 1
2 2 Títuloulo 2
3 3 Título ulo 3
4 4 Título ulo 4
5 5 Título ulo 5
6 6 Título ulo 6
7 7 Título ulo 7
8 8 Título ulo 8
DOBLAJEDOBLAJE
Lista doblaje
Inic dobInic doblajelaje
Selec progSelec programaama
Sentido HDD DSentido HDD DVDVD
Modo XPModo XP
DOBLAJEDOBLAJE
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Sentido doblaje
XPXP
AltoAlto
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Modo gModo gra
DOBLAJEDOBLAJE
HDD DHDD DVDVD
DOBLAJEDOBLAJE
DVD HDDVD HDD
HDD HDD VCRVCR
VCR HDDVCR HDD
DVD VD VCRVCR
VCR DVCR DVDVD
Sentido doblaje
XPXP
AltoAlto
SPSP
LPLP
EPEP
SLPSLP
SEPSEP
Autouto
Modo gra
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
DUBBING MENU
RETURN
ENTER
SETUP
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:44 PM Page 143
144
Español
5
Utilice / y seleccione un programa deseado.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá el Menú de Lista progr.
6
Utilice / para seleccionar Añad a lista doblaje.
Presione ENTER.
El programa seleccionado se agregará a la Lista doblaje.
7
Repita los pasos 5 y 6 hasta que seleccione todos los
programas a doblar.
8
Después de seleccionar todos los programas
deseados, presione
RETURN para volver al
Menú Superior de Doblaje.
9
Utilice / para seleccionar Inic doblaje.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de confirmación.
10
Utilice
/
para seleccionar Sí”.Presione ENTER.
Empezará el doblaje.
Puede demorar en prepararse para el doblaje.
Para parar el doblaje durante el modo de
preparación de doblaje:
Presione primero el Botón de Selección de Equipo
del medio de grabación y presione STOP C.O
presione
STOP/EJECT CAen el panel delantero.
Para parar el doblaje en progreso:
Presione primero el Botón de Selección de Equipo
del medio de grabación y mantenga presionado
STOP C
durante 2 segundos, o presione
STOP/EJECT CA
en el
panel delantero.
Sí NoNo
¿Iniciar doblaje?
Lista doblaje
2 2 Título ulo 2
4 4 Título ulo 4
Inic dobInic doblajelaje
Selec progSelec programaama
Sentido HDD DSentido HDD DVDVD
Modo XPModo XP
DOBLAJEDOBLAJE
Lista doblaje
Lista progr. (Or (Original)
1 1 Título 1tulo 1
2 2 Título 2tulo 2
3 3 Título 3tulo 3
4 4 Título 4tulo 4
5 5 Título 5tulo 5
6 6 Título 6tulo 6
7 7 Título 7tulo 7
8 8 Título 8tulo 8
2 2 Título tulo 2
DOBLAJEDOBLAJE
Decid.Decid.
PlaPlaylist
Añad a lista doblaje
Grabación en HDD / DVD (Cont.)
Finalización
Debe finalizar primero el disco antes de reproducirlo en
otra unidad.
1
Presione SETUP.
2
Utilice / para seleccionar Menú DVD.
Presione
ENTER.
3
Utilice / para seleccionar Finalizar.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de confirmación.
Si ya finalizó el disco,
Anular Finalizar
aparecerá en la lista en el menú en lugar de
Finalizar (sólo DVD-RW).Para anular la
finalización del disco, seleccione
Anular
Finalizar
y presione ENTER.
4
Utilice
/
para seleccionar Sí”.
Presione
ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de confirmación final.
5
Utilice
/
para seleccionar Sí”.
Presione
ENTER.
Empezará la finalización.
Si desea parar el proceso,presione
ENTER.
Esta operación puede
demorar en reconocerse.
FinalizarFinalizar
CancelCancel
Sí NoNo
¿Est Ud seguro?Est Ud seguro?
Sí NoNo
¿Finaliz disco?Finaliz disco?
DVD-R
DVD-R
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:44 PM Page 144
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
145
EspañolEspañol
Reproducción de HDD / DVD
Sistemas de color
Los DVD se graban en diferentes sistemas de color en
diferentes regiones del mundo. El sistema de color más
común es NTSC (que se utiliza primariamente en los
Estados Unidos y Canadá).Esta unidad utiliza NTSC y los
DVD que reproduce deben grabarse en el sistema NTSC.
No puede reproducir DVD grabados en otro sistema de
color.
Códigos de región
Los DVD deben tener la etiqueta para todas las regiones o
para la Región
1.
Busque los siguientes símbolos en su DVD.
Antes de reproducir discos DVD,lea la siguiente información.
Discos que puede reproducir
Esta unidad es compatible para reproducir los
siguientes discos.
Los discos con los siguientes símbolos pueden reproducirse
en la unidad. No se garantiza la reproducción de otros tipos
de discos.
es una marca registrada de DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
SímboloDiscos
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RW
(Modo de VIDEO/VR)
DVD-R
(Modo de VIDEO)
CD-DA
(AUDIO CD)
CD-R
(Formato CD-DA,
archivos MP3 / WMA)
CD-RW
(Formato CD-DA,
archivos MP3 / WMA)
Reproduzca el contenido grabado
Puede seleccionar el título que desea reproducir de la Lista de Títulos. Puede acceder fácilmente a la Lista de Títulos
presionando
TOP MENU.Puede llamar también los títulos grabados presionando PROGRAM RECORDINGS (sólo
la Lista Original del HDD).
¿Qué son títulos y capítulos?
El contenido del HDD / DVD se divide normalmente en títulos.Los títulos pueden
dividirse a su vez en capítulos.
¿Qué es una Lista Original y una Lista de reproducción?
A lo largo de este manual encontrará Lista Original y Lista de reproducción para
referirse al contenido Original y a la versión editada.(Vea la página 89.)
Lista Original se refiere a lo que se grabó originalmente en el disco.
Lista de reproducción se refiere a la versión editada del contenido Lista Original.
Inicio de grab. Parada/inicio Parada grab.
Título 1 Título 2
Capítulo 1 Capítulo 1Capítulo 2 Capítulo 3 Capítulo 2
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:44 PM Page 145
146
EspañolEspañol
Reproducción de HDD / DVD (Cont.)
Reproducción básica
Si está reproduciendo HDD, presione primero HDD.
Si está reproduciendo un disco, presione primero
DVD.
1
Si está reproduciendo HDD, salte al paso 4.
2
Presione OPEN / CLOSE A para abrir la bandeja
del disco.
3
Coloque el disco con su etiqueta hacia arriba. Alinee
el Disco con la guía de la bandeja del disco.
Presione otra vez
OPEN / CLOSE A para cerrar la
bandeja del disco.
Presione
PLAY B para empezar a reproducir un CD.
Para la Reproducción HDD/DVD vaya al paso 4.
Puede demorar en cargar el disco.
4
PresioneTOP MENU.
Aparecerá la lista de título.
Ejemplo: HDD
Presione
MENU / LIST para cambiar entre Lista
Original / Playlist si fuera necesario.
5
Utilice / / / para seleccionar un título
deseado y presione
PLAY B.
Empezará la reproducción.
6
Presione STOP C para parar la reproducción.
ABR/01 12:15PM CH12 XPABR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XPCH12 XP
1
GRABAC. ANTERIORESGRABAC. ANTERIORES
4
5
2
6
3
1
2
HDD
ORG
HDD
PL
DVD
PL
DVD
ORG
ABR/01/05
12:15PM
MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05
10:00AM
JUN/15/05
11:05AM
JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05
10:00AM
guía de
bandeja
de disco
CD
CD
CD
DVD-R
DVD-R
HDDHDDHDD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
HDD DVD
PLAY
STOP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:44 PM Page 146
Before You
Start
Recording /
Dubbing
Playback
Editing
Connections
Other Setups
VCR functions
Initial Setups
Others
Español
147
EspañolEspañol
VCR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
VCR HDD DVD
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DISPLAY
VARIABLE
REPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE
SKIP
REV FWDPLAY
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SKIP
POWER
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS
SETUP
MENU/LIST
ENTER
TOP MENU
AUDIO CLEAR
TIMER
PROG.
INPUT
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
REC MODE
VCR
REC/OTR
STOP PAUSE
CHANNEL
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
JKL
5
MNO
6
SPACE
0
PLAY
Reproducción básica
Presione primero VCR.
1
Coloque una cinta pregrabada y presione PLAY B
para empezar la reproducción.
Si no tiene lengüeta para grabación,la reproducción
empieza automáticamente.
2
Durante la reproducción, presione PAUSE F.
Se hará una pausa de reproducción y se silenciará el
sonido.
3
Presione PLAY B para continuar la reproducción.
4
Presione STOP C para detener la reproducción.
5
Presione STOP / EJECT C A en el panel delantero
de la unidad para expulsar la cinta.
VCRVCR
VCR
Grabación básica
Antes de grabar, asegúrese de que:
Se seleccionó el canal deseado presionando los
botones numéricos
o CHANNEL / .
Hay una cinta con la lengüeta para grabación intacta en la
unidad.
Se selecciona el Modo gra deseado (SP:reproducción
normal o SLP: reproducción de larga duración)
presionando
REC MODE en el control remoto.
Modo gra
Se selecciona Estéreo o SAP.
Presione primero VCR.
1
Presione REC / OTR (VCR) para empezar la
grabación.
Para parar temporalmente o seguir con la grabación,
presione
PAUSE F.Después de que la unidad ha
estado en pausa durante cinco minutos,se parará
automáticamente para proteger la videocinta y la
cabeza de video contra daños.
2
Presione STOP C cuando se complete la grabación.
VCRVCR
VCR
Prevención contra borrado accidental
Para evitar una grabación por accidente en
un casete grabado, rompa la lengüeta de
grabación. Para volver a grabar posterior-
mente, cubra el orificio con cinta adhesiva.
Lengüeta de
grabación
Tipo de cinta T160T120T60
2-2/3 horas2 horas
1 horaModo SP
8 horas6 horas3 horasModo SLP
Velocidad
de la cinta
Tipo de cinta
T160
T
120T60
2-2/3 horas2 horas
1 horaModo SP
8 horas6 horas3 horasModo SLP
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD
S-VIDEORESET
STOP PLAY
HDD DVDREC/OTR
VIDEO L RAUDIO
VCR DVD
HDD DVD
STOP / EJECT C A
POWER
T210
3-1/2 horas
10-1/2 horas
Tiempo de
grabación/reproducción
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:44 PM Page 147
1VMN21832 E4380UD / E438PUD ★★★★★
Printed in China
LIMITED WARRANTY
FUNAI CORP. will repair this product, free of charge in the USA in the event of defect in materials or work-
manship as follows:
DURATION:
PARTS:
FUNAI CORP. will provide parts to replace defective parts without charge for one (1) year
from the date of original retail purchase. Certain parts are excluded from this warranty.
LABOR: FUNAI CORP. will provide the labor without charge for a period of ninety (90) days from the
date of original retail purchase.
LIMITS AND EXCLUSIONS:
This warranty is extended only to the original retail purchaser. A purchase receipt or other proof of origi-
nal retail purchase will be required together with the product to obtain service under this warranty.
This warranty shall not be extended to any other person or transferee.
This warranty is void and of no effect if any serial numbers on the product are altered, replaced, defaced,
missing or if service was attempted by an unauthorized service center. This limited warranty does not
apply to any product not purchased and used in the United States.
This product is produced for home use and this warranty only covers failures due to defects in material or
workmanship which occurs during normal use. It does not cover damage which occurs in shipment, or fail-
ures which are caused by repairs, alterations or product not supplied by FUNAI CORP., or damage which
results from accident, misuse, abuse, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, improper
maintenance, commercial use such as hotel, rental or office use of this product or damage which results
from fire, flood, lightning or other acts of God.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER PACKING MATERIALS, ANY ACCESSORIES (EXCEPT
REMOTE CONTROL), ANY COSMETIC PARTS, COMPLETE ASSEMBLY PARTS, DEMO OR FLOOR
MODELS.
FUNAI CORP. AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES OR AGENTS SHALL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
GENERAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR OCCASIONED BY
THE USE OF OR THE INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND OF ALL OTHER LIABILITIES ON THE PART
OF FUNAI, ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY FUNAI AND ITS
REPRESENTATIVES IN THE UNITED STATES. ALL WARRANTY INSPECTIONS AND REPAIRS MUST
BE PERFORMED BY AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER. THIS WARRANTY IS ONLY VALID WHEN
THE UNIT IS CARRIED-IN TO AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER.
IMPORTANT:
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS.YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IF, AT ANY TIME DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD, YOU ARE
UNABLE TO OBTAIN SATISFACTION WITH THE REPAIR OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE CONTACT
FUNAI CORP.
ATTENTION:
FUNAI CORP. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY ANY DESIGN OF THIS PRODUCT WITHOUT
PRIOR NOTICE.
To locate your nearest AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER or for general service inquiries,
please contact us at:
FUNAI CORPORATION
Customer Service
Tel :1-800-605-8453
http://www.SylvaniaConsumerElectronics.com
19900 Van Ness Avenue, Torrance, CA 90501
E4380_138-148.qx3 05.11.16 2:44 PM Page 148
155

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Sylvania HDRV200F bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Sylvania HDRV200F in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3,88 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info